Chrysler - Pacifica - Owners Manual - 2022 - 2022

U. S. Canada SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS mopar.com/om 2022 Chrysler Pacifica owners.mopar.ca ©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 2 0 2 2 C H RYS L E R PAC I F I C A Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only). Third Edition 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC OWNER’S MANUAL This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public transportation. WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 9 1 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 14 2 3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................110 3 4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 131 4 5 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 187 5 6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 223 6 7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 282 7 8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................309 9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................360 10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 367 11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................. 371 8 9 10 11 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2 2 INTRODUCTION SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 10 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 10 SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KEYS ........................................................................ 14 Key Fob .............................................................14 SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 17 IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 18 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................18 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 19 How To Use Remote Start................................20 To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................20 Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If Equipped........................................................21 Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped........................................................21 Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer Activation — If Equipped ..................................22 Remote Start Cancel Message........................22 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..... 22 To Arm The System .........................................22 To Disarm The System .....................................22 Rearming Of The System .................................23 Security System Manual Override ...................23 DOORS.....................................................................23 Manual Door Locks — If Equipped ..................23 Power Door Locks — If Equipped.....................24 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...........24 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If Equipped........................................................27 Manual Sliding Side Door ................................27 Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped...........28 Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped ........29 Child Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors........................................................30 STEERING WHEEL ..................................................31 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................31 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ............31 DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED.....32 Programming The Memory Feature ................32 Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To Memory ........................................................32 Memory Position Recall ...................................33 SEATS ......................................................................33 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped........................................................33 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................34 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped........................................................47 Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) — If Equipped........................................................49 Heated Seats....................................................51 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................52 Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) — If Equipped .............................52 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks ...............52 Head Restraints ..............................................52 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF EQUIPPED........................................................... 56 Introducing Voice Recognition ........................56 Basic Voice Commands ...................................56 Get Started .......................................................56 Additional Information .....................................57 MIRRORS................................................................ 57 Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................57 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ......................................................58 Outside Mirrors ................................................58 Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped.........................................58 Conversation Mirror .........................................58 Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..........................59 Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped .......................................................59 Automatic Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped.......................................60 Outside Mirrors Folding Feature .....................60 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................60 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .......................................................60 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3 3 UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) ....................................................... 61 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®.......................................................61 Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............61 Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ...................62 Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door Opener .....................................................62 Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous Device ......................................63 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button ...............................................................63 Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........63 Security .............................................................64 Troubleshooting Tips........................................64 EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 65 Multifunction Lever ..........................................65 Headlight Switch...............................................65 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If Equipped........................................................66 High/Low Beam Switch....................................66 Automatic High Beam — If Equipped .............66 Flash-To-Pass ...................................................67 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............67 Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped........................................................67 Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped ...............67 Lights-On Reminder..........................................67 Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......................68 Turn Signals......................................................68 Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................68 Battery Saver ...................................................68 INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................69 Interior Courtesy Lights ...................................69 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS .................70 Windshield Wiper Operation............................70 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ................71 Rear Wiper And Washer...................................71 CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................72 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And Functions...................................................72 Manual Climate Control Descriptions And Functions...................................................77 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped .......................................................82 Climate Voice Commands................................83 Operating Tips .................................................83 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............84 Storage..............................................................84 Sun Screens — If Equipped..............................87 USB/AUX Control..............................................87 Power Outlets ...................................................89 Power Inverter — If Equipped .........................91 Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped .............91 WINDOWS .............................................................. 92 Power Windows ................................................92 Automatic Window Features ...........................93 Reset Auto-Up...................................................93 Wind Buffeting..................................................94 PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED............. 94 Opening And Closing The Sunroof ..................94 Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade — If Equipped..................................95 Pinch Protect Feature ......................................95 Venting Sunroof................................................95 Ignition Off Operation.......................................96 Sunroof Maintenance ......................................96 HOOD....................................................................... 96 Opening.............................................................96 Closing ..............................................................96 LIFTGATE................................................................. 97 To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ..........................97 To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................97 Power Liftgate — If Equipped...........................97 Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped..................99 Cargo Area Features ................................. 100 STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED ........................................................106 Deploying The Crossbars .............................. 106 Stowing The Crossbars ................................. 108 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4 4 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER.......................................110 Instrument Cluster Descriptions .................. 112 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .....................112 Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls.......................................................... 113 Engine Oil Life................................................ 114 KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped..................................................... 115 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..... 116 Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped.................................... 119 TRIP COMPUTER .................................................121 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................121 Red Warning Lights ....................................... 121 Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 124 Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 127 Green Indicator Lights................................... 127 White Indicator Lights ................................... 128 Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 129 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II.................................................................... 129 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................... 129 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ............................. 130 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE ...................................... 131 Normal Starting ............................................ 131 AutoPark ........................................................ 132 Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 134 After Starting — Warming Up The Engine..... 134 If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 134 To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button...................................... 135 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ........ 135 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....... 135 PARKING BRAKE................................................. 136 Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................ 136 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............................139 Ignition Park Interlock................................... 140 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) System ........................................................... 140 9-Speed Automatic Transmission ................ 140 Gear Ranges.................................................. 141 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED ......143 ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ..........................143 POWER STEERING...............................................143 STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............143 Autostop Mode .............................................. 144 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop......................................................... 144 To Start The Engine While In Autostop ........ 145 To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System ........................................................... 145 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System ........................................................... 145 System Malfunction ...................................... 145 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED.........................................................146 Cruise Control................................................ 146 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...................... 147 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5 5 PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....................................156 ParkSense Sensors ....................................... 157 ParkSense Display ........................................ 157 ParkSense Warning Display.......................... 160 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .............. 160 Service The ParkSense Park Assist System ........................................................... 160 Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 161 ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 161 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .....................................162 Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park Assist System............................. 162 Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance Operation .................................... 163 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ............................. 166 LaneSense Operation ................................... 166 Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 166 LaneSense Warning Message...................... 166 Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 168 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .............. 168 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 169 FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.................... 171 REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................... 172 VEHICLE LOADING .............................................. 173 Certification Label ......................................... 173 TRAILER TOWING................................................ 174 Common Towing Definitions......................... 174 Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 176 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings).................................. 177 Vehicle Loading Chart ................................... 178 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 180 Towing Requirements .................................. 180 Towing Tips ................................................... 183 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....................................184 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle ........................................................... 184 DRIVING TIPS .......................................................185 Driving On Slippery Surfaces........................ 185 Driving Through Water ................................. 186 MULTIMEDIA UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................187 CYBERSECURITY .................................................187 UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................188 Customer Programmable Features ............ 188 REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED.........................................................213 Overview ........................................................ 213 Getting Started .............................................. 213 Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV Built-in from the Front Radio Screen ................................................. 213 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6 6 Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV Built-in from the Rear Screens ................................................. 214 First Time Starting Up (Using the Rear Screens) .............................. 214 Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV Built-in Alexa .................................................. 214 Listen Via Vehicle Speakers ......................... 215 Quick Menu.................................................... 215 Parental Controls (Using the Rear Screens) .............................. 215 Pairing The Voice Remote with Alexa (Using the Rear Screens) .............................. 215 Media Sources Input (Using the Front Radio and Rear Screens).............................. 216 Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV Built-in Voice Remote with Alexa.................. 216 Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV Built-in Streaming (Using the Front Radio and Rear Screens).............................. 217 Play A Blu-ray™ or DVD — If Equipped ......... 218 Fire TV Apps/Games (Using the Rear Screens) .............................. 219 Using The Video USB Port............................. 219 Play Video Games ......................................... 219 Headphones Operation................................. 220 Rear Climate Controls................................... 220 Legal & Compliance ...................................... 222 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ............................................................... 222 Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 222 SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 223 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 223 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 224 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 229 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped..................................................... 229 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation — If Equipped ............................... 233 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............................................................ 236 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 239 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 239 Important Safety Precautions ...................... 239 Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 240 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 250 Child Restraints ............................................ 262 SAFETY TIPS ........................................................278 Transporting Passengers.............................. 278 Transporting Pets ......................................... 279 Connected Vehicles ...................................... 279 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle ................................................... 279 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 280 Exhaust Gas................................................... 281 Carbon Monoxide Warnings ....................... 281 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................282 ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED......282 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED.........................................................286 Preparations For Jacking ............................. 286 Jack And Spare Tire Location ....................... 287 Equipment Removal ..................................... 287 Jacking Instructions ..................................... 288 Road Tire Installation.................................... 292 Portable Air Compressor — If Equipped....... 293 Return Inflatable Spare Tire ........................ 294 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .....................294 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7 7 JUMP STARTING...................................................300 Preparations For Jump Start......................... 301 Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 301 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED.........................................................302 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS............................303 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ..................................304 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................305 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................306 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models...................... 308 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) ..................................................................308 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING .....................................309 Maintenance Plan ......................................... 310 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................313 3.6L Engine.................................................... 313 Checking Oil Level ......................................... 314 Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 314 Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 314 Pressure Washing ......................................... 315 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 315 Engine Oil ...................................................... 315 Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 316 Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 316 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 317 Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 317 Body Lubrication ........................................... 320 Windshield Wiper Blades.............................. 320 Exhaust System ............................................ 323 Cooling System.............................................. 324 Brake System ............................................... 327 Automatic Transmission .............................. 328 Fuses.............................................................. 329 Bulb Replacement......................................... 337 TIRES ................................................................... 339 Tire Safety Information ................................. 339 Tires — General Information ......................... 346 Tire Types....................................................... 350 Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 350 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ........................ 352 Snow Traction Devices ................................. 353 Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 355 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................355 Treadwear...................................................... 356 Traction Grades............................................. 356 Temperature Grades..................................... 356 STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................357 BODYWORK..........................................................357 Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......... 357 Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 357 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 357 INTERIORS ...........................................................358 Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 358 Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 359 Leather Surfaces........................................... 359 Glass Surfaces ............................................. 359 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN).......................................................................360 BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................360 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS..................................................360 Torque Specifications ................................... 360 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8 8 FUEL REQUIREMENTS.........................................361 3.6L Engine.................................................... 361 Reformulated Gasoline................................. 361 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 362 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles.......................................................... 362 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 362 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 362 Materials Added To Fuel .............................. 363 Fuel System Cautions ................................... 363 FLUID CAPACITIES ..............................................364 ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ..................365 CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................366 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE ............................................ 367 Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 367 Prepare A List ................................................ 367 Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 367 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE................................. 367 FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 367 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 367 Mexico............................................................ 368 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 368 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ...................................................... 368 Service Contract ............................................ 368 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................369 MOPAR® PARTS .................................................369 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................369 In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C............................................ 369 In Canada ...................................................... 369 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................370 GENERAL INFORMATION....................................370 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9 9 INTRODUCTION Dear Customer, Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped” or, if applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer. When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction. 1 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10 10 SYMBOLS KEY VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! These statements are against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. CAUTION! These statements are against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. NOTE: A suggestion which will improve installation, operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage. TIP: General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the product or functionality. PAGE REFERENCE ARROW Follow this reference for additional information on a particular feature. WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. SYMBOL GLOSSARY Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol Ú page 121. NOTE: Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. Red Warning Lights FOOTNOTE Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to the topic. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings. Air Bag Warning Light Ú page 121 Battery Charge Warning Light Ú page 121 Brake Warning Light Ú page 122 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11 11 Red Warning Lights Red Warning Lights Door Open Warning Light Ú page 122 Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Ú page 124 Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light Ú page 122 Transmission Temperature Warning Light Ú page 124 Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light Ú page 123 Vehicle Security Warning Light Ú page 124 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Ú page 123 Hood Open Warning Light Ú page 123 Liftgate Open Warning Light Ú page 123 Oil Pressure Warning Light Ú page 123 Oil Temperature Warning Light Ú page 123 Yellow Warning Lights Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light Ú page 124 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light Ú page 124 Electronic Park Brake Warning Light Ú page 124 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light Ú page 125 1 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12 12 Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light Ú page 125 Service Stop/Start System Warning Light Ú page 126 Service LaneSense Warning Light Ú page 125 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light Ú page 126 LaneSense Warning Light Ú page 125 Low Fuel Warning Light Ú page 125 Low Washer Fluid Warning Light Ú page 125 Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light Ú page 125 Service AWD Warning Light Ú page 126 Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Warning Light Ú page 126 Yellow Indicator Lights Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) OFF Indicator Light Ú page 127 Green Indicator Lights Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Detected Light Ú page 127 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light Ú page 127 Cruise Control Set Indicator Light Ú page 127 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13 13 Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights Front Fog Indicator Light Ú page 127 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light Ú page 128 KeySense Indicator Light Ú page 128 Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light Ú page 128 LaneSense Indicator Light Ú page 128 LaneSense Indicator Light Ú page 128 Stop/Start Active Indicator Light Ú page 128 Speed Warning Indicator Light Ú page 128 Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light Ú page 128 Set Speed Display Ú page 128 Turn Signal Indicator Lights Ú page 128 Blue Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light Ú page 129 1 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14 14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KEYS KEY F OB Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote Start (if equipped), and remote power liftgate operation. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate, optional power liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding door, from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m). When any button on the key fob is pushed, or when any signal is being transferred between the key fob and the vehicle, an LED light on the key fob will flash as an indicator. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob. The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob become depleted. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. NOTE:  The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device. This may result in poor performance.  If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad Ú page 91.  With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are disabled. Key Fob 1 — LED Light 2 — Unlock 3 — Liftgate 4 — Left Power Sliding Side Door 5 — Emergency Key 6 — Lock 7 — Remote Start 8 — Right Power Sliding Side Door 9 — PANIC Alarm 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to follow. NOTE:  A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a message in the instrument cluster display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illuminates from key fob button pushes, then the key fob battery requires replacement.  The key fob LED light brightness is designed for indoor light viewing, so the LED light may not be visible in direct sunlight Ú page 370. To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver’s front door and sliding door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate. Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors and the liftgate. When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp. Settings in the Uconnect system can change to lights only, chirp only, or both. Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the doors can be locked. The doors will unlock again only if the key fob is inside the passenger compartment. All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button within Uconnect Settings Ú page 188. Key Left Vehicle Feature If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display along with an interior chime. An exterior audible and visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver. The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights. NOTE:  The doors have to be open and then closed in order for the vehicle to check for the presence of a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.  These alerts will not be activated in situations where the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob inside. 15 Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. NOTE:  Customers are recommended to use a battery obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery dimensions.  Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose old batteries by placing them in correct containers according to the law or by taking them to a dealership, where they will be handled appropriately.  Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information.  Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16 16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the mechanical release button on the side of the key fob with your thumb and then pulling the key out with your other hand. 5. Align the back cover into its original position and snap it back in place by pushing it against the fob until it is seated all around. WARNING!  Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. CAUTION!  The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just two hours and can lead to death.  If you think a battery may have been swal- lowed or placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate medical attention. Emergency Key Removal 2. Insert a coin or a flat blade screwdriver into the now exposed slot and carefully pry on both sides to disengage the snaps. Gently remove the back cover from the fob, being careful not to damage any of the snaps. 3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery rearward in its pocket until the battery lifts up. Remove the depleted battery from the battery pocket and dispose appropriately. 4. Fit a new battery ensuring that the positive (+) side is facing upwards. Push the battery into the pocket until it is firmly seated in place and secured under both tabs.  Keep new and used batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, stop using the product and keep it away from children. Programming And Requesting Additional Key Fobs Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer. NOTE:  Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.  Always remember to place the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the OFF position. Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. NOTE:  When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.  Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match the vehicle locks. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KeySense Features — If Equipped KeySense Unique Splash Screen This feature provides the vehicle owner with the ability to customize vehicle settings that can be applied to determine the driving experience for other drivers of the vehicle. The vehicle settings are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time. At vehicle start-up, the KeySense splash screen should inform the driver that the vehicle will be functioning in KeySense mode when the KeySense key is in use. KeySense also has additional features that are always enabled when the specific key is in use that cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While this specific key fob is in use, the vehicle will respond accordingly to the customized vehicle settings and mandatory features. This includes enhanced driving assistance features, increased driver alerts, and the locking of certain optional features. These settings can be selected within the Uconnect system Ú page 188. Start Up Display Features  Unique splash screen graphic  Telltale illuminated  After unique splash screen, and after stored messages are cycled, then start-up KeySense messages (Range & Max Speed) are displayed The following features are always enabled when this key is in use:  Entertainment audio muted if front occupied seat belts are not fastened  Consistent seat belt unfastened chime  Maximum radio volume limited to 15 out of 39  Daytime Running Lights  Headlights On With Wipers  Rain Sensing Wipers  Automatic High Beams KeySense Key Fob 17 SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle. After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two seconds. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18 18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. The START/STOP ignition button has four operating positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START, RUN will illuminate. KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION (e.g. power windows) ON/RUN  All electrical devices are available The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. IGNITION SWITCH  Some electrical devices are available  Driving position CAUTION! All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Ú page 370. ACC  The engine is stopped (e.g. climate controls, etc.) START  The engine will start (when foot is on the brake pedal) START/STOP Ignition Button 1 — OFF 2 — ACC 3 — ON/RUN If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes: This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.  The engine is stopped OFF  Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.) are still available The engine only runs with the ignition in the ON/RUN ignition position, or from a Remote Start request. In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.  Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death. Backup Starting Method WARNING!  When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. (Continued) CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. 19 REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of 328 ft (100 m). Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient conditions before the customer enters the vehicle. NOTE: Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may reduce this range Ú page 370. WARNING!  Do not start or run an engine in a closed NOTE:  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from starting the vehicle.  For the proper engine starting procedure, see Ú page 131. garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20 20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.  The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi- tion before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for a third cycle. WARNING!  Do not start or run an engine in a closed  Doors closed Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the engine off. garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.  Hood closed  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.  Hazard switch off NOTE:  With Remote Start, the engine will only run for 15 minutes.  Remote Start can only be used twice.  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down after 10 seconds.  The parking lights will turn on, and remain on, during Remote Start mode.  For security, power window and power sunroof (if equipped) operation are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:  Gear selector in PARK  Liftgate closed  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)  Battery at an acceptable charge level  PANIC button not pushed  System not disabled from previous Remote Start event  Vehicle Security Light flashing  Ignition in OFF position  Fuel level meets minimum requirement  Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intrusion  Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated of the Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. TO EXIT R EMOTE START M ODE To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start system, either push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the START/STOP ignition button. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The Remote Start system will turn the engine off with another push and release of the Remote Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume previously set operations (temperature, blower control, etc.). NOTE:  For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push Start Button” will show in the instrument cluster display until you push the START/STOP ignition button.  To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request. REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the system will automatically adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next section for detailed operation. REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — I F E QUIPPED When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat feature will turn on if selected in the Comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 188. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when Remote Start is activated, if programmed in the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control settings depending on the outside ambient temperature. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped The climate controls will be automatically adjusted to the optimal temperature and mode settings depending on the outside ambient temperature. This will occur until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position where the climate controls will resume their previous settings. 21 Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped  In ambient temperatures at 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the climate settings will default to maximum heat, with fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.  In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last settings selected by the driver.  In ambient temperatures at 78°F (26°C) or above, the climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on. For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control settings, see Ú page 72. NOTE: These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will change, and exit automatic operation, if manually adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This includes the OFF button on the climate controls, which will turn the system off. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22 22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE START W INDSHIELD W IPER DE-I CER ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED When the Remote Start system is active and the outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue. REMOTE START C ANCEL MESSAGE The following messages will display in the instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:  Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open  Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open  Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low  Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open  Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold  Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired  Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks, power sliding doors and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security system provides both audible and visible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash. 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:  Push lock on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.  Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry door handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone Ú page 24.  Push the lock button on the key fob. 3. If any doors are open, close them. TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM TO ARM THE SYSTEM The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of the following methods: Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:  Push the unlock button on the key fob. 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position.  For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.  Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped) Ú page 24.  Hands-Free Liftgate Passive Entry activation (if equipped). 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE  Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF position.  For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry, push the START/STOP ignition button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle). If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system. NOTE: REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM  The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles and up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself. button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security system.  The Vehicle Security system remains armed during power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm the Vehicle Security system. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will sound.  When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system. 2 Manual Front Door Lock SECURITY S YSTEM MANUAL O VERRIDE The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock. DOORS MANUAL D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED To lock each door, rotate the door lock on each door trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock button until the ribbing is visible. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red indicator is visible. 23 Manual Rear Door Lock 1 — Door Handle 2 — Manual Door Lock 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24 24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE If the door lock is in the locked position (no ribbing is visible) when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle before closing the door. NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate. WARNING!  For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. WARNING!  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. POWER D OOR L OCKS — IF EQUIPPED A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure NOTE: the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.  Passive Entry may be programmed on/off through the Uconnect system Ú page 188.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with (Continued) KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE E NTRY The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.  Never use the PARK position as a substitute for access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your key fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and a door is open, as a reminder to place the ignition in the OFF position and remove the key fob.  The key fob may not be detected by the Passive Driver Power Door Lock Switches Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:  If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings, unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illuminated approach (low beams, license plate light, parking lights) for the time 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry also initiates two flashes of the turn signals.  A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a door is open.  A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle while a door is open.  If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/  A lock request is made by the door panel switch snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. while the door is open. Grab The Door Handle To Unlock  If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and will arm the Vehicle Security system (if equipped).  The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the outside using the hands-free or Passive Entry system. To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side: With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver’s side doors (driver/sliding door) automatically. Grabbing the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will rotate when the door is unlocked. 25 NOTE:  Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle, depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect system Ú page 188.  All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting. Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe) To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature. When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it detects a key fob inside the car, and it does not detect any key fob outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer. NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions are met:  The doors are manually locked using the door lock knobs.  Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the door panel switch and then the doors are closed.  There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door handle. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26 26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handle, push the door handle lock button to lock all four doors and the liftgate. The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release button. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release button for a power open on vehicles equipped with Power Liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and lift for Manual Liftgate vehicles. On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key fob can be locked in the vehicle. To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking NOTE:  After pushing the door handle lock button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle unlocking. Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).  If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect Settings, the key protection described in "Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.  The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is depleted. Electronic Liftgate 1 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle 2 — Passive Entry Lock Button 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Lock The Liftgate With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located to the right of the liftgate release handle. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob lock button, or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel Ú page 370. MANUAL S LIDING SIDE DOOR The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to open the sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and rocking forward releases the hold open latch in order to close the door. The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door is opened. This will occur only after the gear selector has been placed into the PARK position, after the vehicle has been driven (the gear selector has been placed out of PARK and all doors closed). This feature can be turned on or off in the Uconnect system Ú page 188. To keep your door operating properly, observe the following guidelines:  Always open the door smoothly.  Avoid high impacts against the door stop when opening the door. This is very important when your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in the downhill direction.  There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the exterior handle. AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT — I F EQUIPPED The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not operate if there is any manual operation of the door locks (lock or unlock). 27 Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched anytime the vehicle is in motion. NOTE: Side Door Handle And Lock Functions 1 — Door Handle 2 — Door Lock The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the fuel door is open. If attempted, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display, and the door will automatically return to the closed position. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28 28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE POWER S LIDING SIDE DOOR — I F EQUIPPED The power off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit when the handles are manual. When the LED is lit, pushing the power sliding door power off button will return the handles to power operation. The power sliding door may be power opened or closed in several ways: NOTE:  Key fob  If anything obstructs the power sliding side door  Inside or outside handles  Buttons located:  In the overhead console  Just inside the sliding door  On the outside handle Push the button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding door. The key fob and the overhead console button will operate the door when the door is locked. All other ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pushing the button on the outside handle or Hands-Free feature (if equipped) will unlock and open the sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. Overhead Console Power Switches 1 — Liftgate 2 — Left Sliding Door 3 — Sliding Door Power Off 4 — Right Sliding Door while it is closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with sliding door movements.  If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to obstacles, it will power open on the next command. There is a power sliding side door switch located on the B-pillar trim panel on the driver’s and passenger’s side, just in front of the power sliding door for the rear seat passengers. To operate the sliding door manually with the handles or to avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding doors from the rear seats, push the power sliding door power off button, located in the overhead console, to remove power to the handles and buttons just inside the sliding doors. Power Sliding Side Door Switch (Left Side Shown) 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE  With every movement of the Hands-Free Sliding WARNING! Doors, an audible tone will sound and the turn signals will flash. You can turn these alerts on or off in the Uconnect system Ú page 188.  Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear before closing the door.  If anything obstructs the power sliding side door  Before driving off, check the instrument cluster for a sliding door or door open message or warning indicator. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the sliding door open while driving. HANDS-FREE S LIDING DOORS — I F EQUIPPED To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle in the general location below the door handle(s). Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the motion. 29 Activation Zone When a valid kicking motion is completed, the sliding door will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the sliding door will open almost instantaneously. This assumes all options are enabled in the Uconnect Settings. NOTE:  To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the door will not respond to any kicks.  The Hands-Free Sliding Doors will only operate when the gear selector is in PARK. while it is closing or opening, the door will automatically reverse to the closed or open position and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with sliding door movements.  If the power sliding doors encounter multiple obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop. The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be turned off through Uconnect Settings Ú page 188. NOTE: The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature should be turned off during jacking, tire changing, and vehicle service. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30 30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CHILD P ROTECTION D OOR L OCK S YSTEM — R EAR D OORS 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system. NOTE: To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock 1. Open the sliding side door. 2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child Protection Door Lock control inward (toward the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.  After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is in the locked position.  After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is in the unlocked position.  The inside door handle will not open the sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock is engaged.  The power sliding door will operate from the switch located just inside the sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock lever position.  To avoid unintentional operation of the power Child Protection Door Locks sliding door from the rear seats, push the Sliding Door Power Off button, located in the overhead console. When the overhead console power OFF LED is illuminated, the sliding door may not be power opened or closed by pushing the buttons just inside the sliding doors or pulling on the handles. WARNING! Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. Remember that the sliding doors cannot be opened from the inside door handle when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged. To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock 1. Open the sliding side door. 2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control outward (away from the vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. NOTE: After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Protection Door Lock, always test the inside door handle with the sliding door closed to make certain the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired position. The inside door handle will open the sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock is disengaged. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STEERING WHEEL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING C OLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/ telescoping lever is located left of the steering wheel at the end of the steering column. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — I F E QUIPPED Tilt/Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. This time will vary based on environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm. 31 The heated steering wheel button is located within the Uconnect system. You can access the button through the Comfort screen.  Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element on.  Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element off. NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. For information on use with the Remote Start system, see Ú page 21. WARNING!  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.  Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32 32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED 3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument cluster display will show which memory position has been set. This feature allows the driver to save up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile saves desired position settings for the following features: NOTE:  Driver’s seat Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK.  Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (if equipped)  Power steering wheel position (if equipped)  Side mirrors (if equipped)  A set of desired radio station presets NOTE:  Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.  Memory settings will be linked to the driver profiles in the Uconnect system, in addition to several other features (radio presets, home screens, settings, navigation, phone, etc.) Ú page 188. The Driver Memory Settings switch is located on the driver door, next to the door handle, and consists of three buttons:  The set (S) button, which is used to activate the memory save function.  The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of two saved memory profiles. Driver Memory Switch 1 — Memory Profile Button 1 2 — Memory Profile Button 2 3 — Set Button PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE To create a new memory profile, perform the following: NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile from memory. 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors and radio station presets). LINKING A ND U NLINKING T HE KEY FOB T O MEMORY Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two saved memory profiles. NOTE: Before programming your key fob you must select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 188. To program your key fob, perform the following: 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position. 2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2. 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster. 5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds. NOTE: Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and then, within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the key fob. MEMORY POSITION R ECALL NOTE:  The vehicle speed must be less than or equal to A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory buttons on the driver's door during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat stops moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected. Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the memory mirror recall. SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the vehicle. WARNING!  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside  Memory settings can be linked to driver profiles  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push the desired memory button (1 or 2) on the driver's door or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the desired memory position. MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (FRONT S EATS) — I F E QUIPPED WARNING!  Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is NOTE: 5 mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display. in the Uconnect system. Changing driver profiles will also recall the linked memory settings if the conditions are met Ú page 188. 33 or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34 34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual Front Adjuster Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat. WARNING!  Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Seat Height Adjustment Manual Seat Adjustment 1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar 2 — Height Adjustment 3 — Recline Lever While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height. Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment For models equipped with manual seats, the recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS) WARNING!  Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Manual Forward/Rearward Adjustment — Quad Seats (If Equipped) Both second row seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat. WARNING!  Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Recline — Quad Seats 35 To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped The second row bench seat can accommodate two passengers, while providing easy access to the third row seats without any folding of the second row seats. Manual Rear Seat Adjuster While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. Recline Lever 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36 36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat cushion, and push back to the desired position and release the lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has latched. Removing The Bench Seat 1. Adjust the driver and passenger seats forward to allow room for the bench seat removal. 2. Raise the armrest completely, then lift the recline lever located on the outboard side of the seat to fold the seatback flat against the seat cushion. Release Strap Location 4. Once the latches are released, tilt the entire seat toward the front of the vehicle. The seat can now be removed through either sliding side door, or through the liftgate. Recline Lever The bench seat does not stow in the floor, but is removable for added cargo space. Folded Position 3. Pull the release strap located behind the seat, in the center near the floor to release the latches. Tilt Bench Seat Forward 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:  Due to the weight of the bench seat, it is recom- mended that two people are utilized for its removal.  When storing the removed bench seat, it is 37 Second Row Removable 8th Seat — If Equipped While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is foldable and removable for added cargo space. 2 important to keep the seatback in the folded position. Reinstalling The Bench Seat 1. To reinstall the bench seat, align the seats front attachments into the detent positions on the floor. Release Strap NOTE: 2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seatback into its original position. NOTE: Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in the locked position. 3. Lift the recline handle and return the seatback to the seating position. WARNING! If not properly latched, the seat could become loose. Personal injuries could result. Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to release the rear latches. The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle by moving it in a rearward direction from the detent positions in the floor. The seat can be removed easier with one outboard seat stowed in the load floor. To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seatback into its original position. In Floor Detent Guides 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38 38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! If not properly latched, the seat could become loose. Personal injuries could result. Fold-Flat — Quad Seats To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion. Stow ‘n Go Seating Head Restraint Lift Easy Tilt Seat Lever (If Equipped) Easy Entry Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat Installed The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy entry into the third row with or without a child seat installed. Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever NOTE:  The seatback may lock into the fold-flat position. Use the recline lever to unlock the seatback.  If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating: when returning the seat to the original position, the headrest must be folded back to the original position. 1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is a lever (or handle for Stow ‘n Go seats) that provides easier access to the third row by tilting the seat forward. 2. Slide the lever upwards, or if equipped, pull the handle forward, to unlock the seatback. Pull Easy Tilt Seat Handle (If Equipped) 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to access the third row. 4. To put the seat back into original position, just pull back on the seatback and lock the seat into position. WARNING! Do not use this feature with a child in seat. Serious injury or death may occur. Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat Easy Tilt Seat The seats can be folded and tilted for more accessibility for passengers to enter and exit the third row. 39 2. To put it back into position, pull back on the folded seat and make sure that it locks into position. Then, pull the seatback toward the back and fold down the arm rests. Exit For Third Row Passengers — Stow ‘n Go Seats Only If the second row is equipped with Stow ‘n Go, third row passengers can pull on the strap and push the seat forward for folding the seatback down and tilting the seat to the floor for an easy exit. 1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the seat by pulling the recliner handle on the bottom part of the seat. Before pulling the recliner lever, make sure the arm rests are folded up. Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers NOTE: This process is for when there is no child seat installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is installed. Easy Tilt With Child Seat Installed Recliner Lever 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40 40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Second Row Removable Quad Seat the bar on the rear side of the seat cushion for easy removal. The second row quad seats, not equipped with the Stow ‘n Go feature, are removable for added cargo space. Removing Seat 1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position. 2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat against the seat cushion. Seat Release Strap 4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to release the rear latches. 5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward position. Seat Removal Reinstalling Seat 1. To reinstall the seat: With the seat tilted forward, align the seat’s front attachments into the detent positions on the floor. Lift Recline Lever And Fold Seatback Flat NOTE: Push downward on the seatback to make sure it is in the locked position. 3. The release strap is located on the front of the seat, near the floor. Tilt Seat Forward 6. The seat assembly can now be removed from the vehicle. Grab the front seatback edge located near the head restraint and the grab In Floor Seat Detents 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41 Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If Equipped 1. Lower the center head restraint down to the seatback by pushing the button on the guide and pushing the head restraint down. 2 2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the anchors. Strap “2” Installing Seat 2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its original position. NOTE: Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in the locked position. 3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back to the seating position. WARNING! If not properly latched, the seat could become loose. Personal injuries could result. Release Strap “1” 3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat rearward into the storage bin. Stowed Third Row Seat 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42 42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Unfold Third Row Seats 1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors latch. 3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position. WARNING!  In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched.  Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied. Assist Straps 2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return to its full upright position. The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature is available to both the front driver and passenger power seats (if equipped). WARNING! During power seat operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the front seat is not occupied and the seat travel path is clear when operating the power seat. A one-touch Auto Advance ‘n Return button is located on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power sliding door. Stow 'n Go Seating On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating, the second and third row seats can be folded into the floor for convenient storage. AUTO ADVANCE ‘N RETURN — IF EQUIPPED On vehicles equipped with the Auto Advance ‘n Return feature, the front seat will move forward automatically to a location that will allow the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement, without interference by the front seat. After the second row seat is stowed, the front seat will move back to the previous location once the Auto Advance ‘n Return button is pushed again. Strap “2” Auto Advance ‘n Return Button (Left Side Shown) 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Using the Auto Advance ‘n Return Feature NOTE:  The button is only functional when the power sliding door is open and the vehicle is in PARK. If the door is not open or the vehicle is not in PARK when the button is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.  If the power sliding door is closing when the button is pushed, the front seat will not move and a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.  The Auto Advance ‘n Return feature will not function if the front doors are open. 1. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return button. 2. Perform the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement Ú page 43. 3. Push and release the Auto Advance ‘n Return button a second time. The front seat cushion and seatback will return to the original starting location. NOTE:  To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button, or push the front power seat button to stop the seat movement. Pushing the Auto Advance ‘n Return button again will return the front seat to the original starting location.  The Auto Advance ‘n Return system includes obstacle detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the seat will stop, reverse direction, and return to the previous location. A message will be displayed in the instrument cluster indicating that an obstacle has been detected. 43 For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button located on the B-pillar trim (if equipped) Ú page 42. 1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock rod in the locked position.  If the front seat is already in a location that will allow space for Stow ‘n Go of the second row seat, the front seat will not move and a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster.  If calibration of the front seat is lost, the seat will automatically recalibrate when the Auto Advance ‘n Return button is pushed. This may result in the seat cushion moving forward and downward, before moving to the location that will allow space for the second row Stow ‘n Go seat movement. SECOND ROW STOW 'N GO For Manual Seats: To stow the seat in the floor, move the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat adjustment bar. Move the seatback all the way forward using the recliner handle located on the outboard side of the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid position using the height adjuster handle in the outboard side of the cushion. Lock Rod NOTE:  Push the lock rod inward for the unlocked position.  Pull outward on the lock rod for the locked position.  For information on storage bin function with the seats rearward Ú page 85. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44 44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open the floor panel. 4. Remove the plastic storage bin (if equipped) from the storage area, and store in a safe location. 5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat by grabbing the strap on the lower part of the seatback, and guide the seat into the storage area. Push To Lock 7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel backwards by the bottom corner edge of the panel. Floor Latch 3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front seats while folding the top half down and rest it against the front seats. Pull Strap 6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat into the storage area. Extend Floor Panel Push Panel Forward 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place. CAUTION!  The storage bin cover must be latched and flat 45 1. To access the storage area, remove the floor mat (if equipped) and place the lock rod in the unlocked position. to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. 2  Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in the stowed position with the seatback upright otherwise damage to the seat may occur. Push To Lock 9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the floor mat (if equipped). WARNING! In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched:  Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open.  Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion.  Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. TO UNSTOW SECOND ROW SEATS For Manual Seats: To unstow the seat from the floor, move the front seat all the way forward using the manual seat adjustment bar. For Power Seats: Push the Auto Advance ‘n Return button located on the B-pillar trim (if equipped) Ú page 42. Lock Rod NOTE:  Push the lock rod inward for the unlocked position.  Pull outward on the lock rod for the locked position. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46 46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open the floor panel. 4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the seat out of the storage area. Push the seat rearward making sure that it locks into the floor. Fold the seatback into the upright position and pull the headrest up. NOTE: The seatback may be locked, if it is, it will be necessary to use the recliner handle to unlock the back before folding into the upright position. Extend Panel 7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it clicks into position. Floor Latch 3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the front seats while folding the top half down and rest it against the front seats. Pull Strap 5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the storage area. 6. To position the floor panel back into its original state, grab the bottom corner and extend it outward. Push Panel Forward Push Down To Lock 8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and replace the floor mat (if equipped). 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING!  In a collision, you or others in your vehicle  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully latched. the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.  Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. Always make sure the head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is to be occupied. POWER ADJUSTMENT (F RONT SEATS) — I F EQUIPPED Some models may be equipped with eight-way power seats for the driver and front passenger. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the seat. The switches control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback. 47 CAUTION! Driver Power Seat Switches Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. 1 — Seat Switch 2 — Seatback Switch 3 — Lumbar Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward WARNING!  Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. (Continued) The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by using the seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48 48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in two directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. Power Lumbar — If Equipped WARNING! dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the Power Lumbar Switch Location  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that The front driver’s and passenger’s seat may be equipped with a four way lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the equipped power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support. the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.  When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF position.  When the ignition is placed in the OFF position,  Adjusting a seat while driving may be seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7 – 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF position.  The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE When enabled within Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile (if equipped) Ú page 32. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled within the Uconnect system Ú page 188. POWER A DJUSTMENT (R EAR SEATS) — I F EQUIPPED WARNING!  Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly on the occupant and they could be more seriously injured in an accident as a result. 49 Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push and hold the forward or rearward button, the seat will move in the direction of the button push. Release the button when the desired position is reached. CAUTION! WARNING!  Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. (Continued) Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. Third Row Power Recline — If Equipped The power recline feature, located on the trim panel next to the seat, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward for occupant comfort. Third Row Power Seat Switch NOTE: The third row power recline buttons can be locked out using the Third Row Lockout setting within the Uconnect system Ú page 188. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50 50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Third Row Power Stow ‘n Go Seat — If Equipped A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in the right rear trim panel as part of a switch bank. Left and right third row seats can be folded individually or together. The third row power folding seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch bank located on the left rear trim panel: 1. Disconnect the center shoulder belt from the mini-buckle before attempting to fold/stow the power third row seats. NOTE: The third row outboard seat belts may interfere with the power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt webbing behind the stow clip before stowing or opening the seat. When the seat is in the desired position, remove the webbing from the stow clip so that it is ready for use. Never leave the seat belt in the stow clip when it is used to restrain an occupant. NOTE:  The outer head restraints will lower automati- cally as necessary when the power seat begins to move.  The center head restraint raises and lowers manually but will not lower automatically.  The head restraint can also be lowered manu- ally using the pull strap located at the back of the seat Ú page 55. The switch is only functional when the liftgate is open and the vehicle is in PARK. The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and unfolding positions for the third row seats. To move the selected seat(s) back in the forward or reverse direction, push and hold the “Fold Forward/Back” button. Release the button when the desired position is reached. 2. Before pushing the “Normal” or “Stow” button, place the outboard seat belt webbing behind the stow clips, located on the rear trim panel. When the seat reaches the desired position, remove the webbing from the clip so it is ready for use to restrain an occupant. Rear Panel Power Switch Bank 1 — Open To Normal 2 — Stow 3 — Fold Forward/Rearward 4 — Right/Left Seats/Both Seats To move the selected seat(s) to the normal (seated) position, push and release the “Normal” button. The seat will automatically stop when the Normal position is reached. To move the selected seat(s) to the stow position, push and release the “Stow” button. The seat will automatically stop when the Stow position is reached. Seat Belt Stowage Clip 3. To abort seat operation while seat is in motion, push a different seat position selector switch to stop the seat. Once the seat stops moving, then the desired position can be selected. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 4. The third row power seat system includes obstacle detection. When the system detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse direction. Should this occur, remove the obstacle before pushing the button again. HEATED S EATS Front Heated Seats — If Equipped The front heated seats control buttons are located in the touchscreen. You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.  Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on.  Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the LO setting on.  Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the heating elements off. The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it. NOTE:  Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.  The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. 51 For information on use with the Remote Start system, see Ú page 21. WARNING!  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.  Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped On some models, the second row seats are equipped with heaters. There are two heated seat switches that allow the second row passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches are located on the sliding side door handle trim panels. 2 Second Row Heated Seat Switch (Left Side Shown) You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off. Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the heating elements off. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52 52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE VENTILATED S EATS — I F E QUIPPED Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO. The front ventilated seats control buttons are located in the touchscreen. ADJUSTABLE ARMREST (F RONT S EATS) — I F E QUIPPED PLASTIC G ROCERY BAG RETAINER H OOKS Your vehicle may be equipped with adjustable armrests on the front seats. The armrest can be adjusted up or down. Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the seatbacks of the second row rear seats, and if equipped, the backs of the front row seats. The floor supports the partial weight of the bagged goods. To adjust the armrest height, push and hold the button while moving the armrest to the desired position. Release the button to lock the armrest into place.  Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.  Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose LO.  Press the ventilated seat button a third time to Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. WARNING! turn the ventilated seat off.  All occupants, including the driver, should not NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. For information on use with the Remote Start system, see Ú page 21. HEAD R ESTRAINTS Adjustable Armrest Adjustment Button operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.  Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53 Head Restraints — Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with four-way head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward. The front head restraints are also adjustable forward and rearward. To tilt forward, pull the top of the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle to the desired position. To adjust the head restraint rearward, continue pulling forward on the top of the head restraint to the furthest forward position and the head restraint will return to the upright position. 2 Front Head Restraint 1 — Release Button 2 — Adjustment Button WARNING!  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment. NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. Forward Adjustment  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Normal Position 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54 54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraints — Second Row Quad Seats The second row outboard head restraints, as well as the removable 8th passenger seat (if equipped), may have adjustable head restraints. NOTE: If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head restraints are non-adjustable and non-removable. Do not pull on non-adjustable head restraints when folding the seat. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward. To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. Head Restraints — Second Row Bench The second row bench seat is equipped with adjustable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward. To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. WARNING!  A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment. Bench Seat Head Restraint 1 — Release Button 2 — Adjustment Button  ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. NOTE: For information on child restraint tethering, see Ú page 239. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Head Restraints — Third Row The outboard head restraints can be manually folded forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull the release strap to fold them forward. NOTE: To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as it can go. Then, push the release button and the adjustment button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then, using the adjustment button, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height. 55 POWER FOLDING THIRD ROW HEAD RESTRAINTS — IF EQUIPPED For improved visibility, the third row outboard head restraints can be folded using the Uconnect system. Press Vehicle, then Controls located on the bottom of the Uconnect display. Press the Head Restraint Fold button to power fold the third row head restraints. NOTE:  The head restraints can be folded downward using the Head Restraint button or using the manual release strap. The head restraints must be raised manually when occupying the third row. Release Straps NOTE:  Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the  The head restraints must be raised manually when occupying the third row.  Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third row seats. The head restraint in the center position can be raised and lowered for tether routing or height adjustment Ú page 239. Adjustment Button WARNING! ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. third row seats. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56 56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION — IF EQUIPPED I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your system. BASIC VOICE COMMANDS The following basic Voice Commands can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system. Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep, say:  “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.  “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again. Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice Recognition system’s status. GET S TARTED The VR button is used to activate/deactivate your Voice Recognition system. Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:  Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.  Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead.  Each time you give a Voice Command, first push the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. You can also say the vehicle “Wake Up” word and state your command. NOTE: The factory default Wake Up word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed through the Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:  A passenger can press the VR button shortcut on the radio status bar to also issue a command.  You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a Voice Command or saying the vehicle’s “Wake Up” word and saying a command from the current category. Uconnect Voice Command Buttons 1 — Push To Answer An Incoming Phone Call 2 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send Or Receive A Text 2 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION © 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 370. Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). 57 NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE. If your vehicle is not equipped with an on/off button on the mirror, the mirror will default to on and can be turned on/off through the touchscreen. For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canada). MIRRORS I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR Manual Mirror — If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver to adjust up, down and left, right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Automatic Dimming Mirror On/Off Button Manual Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58 58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS — I F EQUIPPED To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the visors and lift the cover. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. CONVERSATION MIRROR Located in the overhead console there is a conversation mirror to view all the passengers in the vehicle. Push the panel to release the drop down mirror. Raise the mirror and push to latch it back in the stowed position. DRIVER' S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR — I F EQUIPPED Illuminated Mirror OUTSIDE MIRRORS The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view. The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts. Conversation Mirror 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE POWER M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side door trim panel. Power Mirror Controls Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. Left and Right side power mirror positions can be saved as part of the driver memory profile (if equipped) Ú page 32. If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled. If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they will automatically unfold. POWER F OLDING OUTSIDE M IRRORS — I F E QUIPPED The switch for the power folding mirrors is located between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors to the normal driving position.  The mirrors are accidentally blocked while You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the following occurs: folding  The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/ unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power folding mirror switch).  The mirrors come out of the unfolded position  The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving speeds To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold them by pushing the button (this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position. The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the mirror that you want to adjust. A light in the selected button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted. NOTE: Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors 1 — Left Mirror Select 2 — Mirror Control Switch 3 — Right Mirror Select NOTE: 59 Power Folding Mirror Switch 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60 60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE AUTOMATIC POWER F OLDING MIRRORS — IF E QUIPPED If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they will unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. TILT SIDE MIRRORS I N REVERSE — I F E QUIPPED When enabled within Uconnect Settings Ú page 188, the exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after the doors are locked and closed. NOTE: Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The driver's outside mirror will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The driver's outside mirror will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position. The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following situations after the ignition is placed in the OFF position:  Pushing the lock button on the door panel before the door is opened. NOTE: If the doors are already locked, push the lock button again.  Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on the door panel, followed by closing the door.  After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push the lock button on the key fob.  After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch the lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle. If the mirrors were folded manually, by using the power folding mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will not automatically unfold. OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions:  Full forward position  Full rearward position  Normal position HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped) Ú page 72. NOTE: The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®)  The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead console or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink® channels.  To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will activate the devices they are programmed to with each press of the corresponding HomeLink® button. Use this QR code to access your digital experience.  HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery. It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first time. ERASING ALL THE H OMELINK® C HANNELS To erase the channels, follow this procedure: NOTE: 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position. HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system is active Ú page 370. HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.  The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the center button. BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate the device you are trying to program your HomeLink® button to. 61 2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes. NOTE: Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62 62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A R OLLING C ODE OR N ON-R OLLING C ODE DEVICE Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code. Rolling Code Devices To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the antenna is attached to the device. The button may not be immediately visible when looking at the device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly by manufacturer. NOTE: The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you normally use to operate the device. Non-rolling Code Devices Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A GARAGE DOOR OPENER To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your garage door opener motor, proceed as follows: NOTE: All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when programming additional buttons. 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program, while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you push and hold the garage door opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate. 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this happens, release both buttons. NOTE: Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/ non-rolling code final steps. Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1. 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. 2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink® button three times (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener motor operates, programming is complete. 3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling code procedure. Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps 1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat the steps from the beginning. WARNING!  Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transmitter. Do not program the transmitter if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate.  Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or confined area while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and can cause you and others to be severely injured or killed. PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as programming to a garage door opener Ú page 62. Be sure to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code before beginning the programming process. NOTE: Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to be performed multiple times to successfully pair the device to your HomeLink® buttons. REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE HOMELINK® B UTTON To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been previously trained, without erasing all the channels, proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling code, or non-rolling code. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without starting the engine. 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining steps. 63 CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR P ROGRAMMING For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission: Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor. 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door remains open at all times. 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64 64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained. 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming. 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. NOTE:  If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.  To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/Gate Operator) To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all remaining steps. SECURITY It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security system is active. TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions:  Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-held transmitter.  Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for a rolling code.  Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. WARNING!  Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.  Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE EXTERIOR LIGHTS HEADLIGHT SWITCH MULTIFUNCTION L EVER The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. The switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, interior lights, and the fog lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. The multifunction lever controls the turn signals, headlight high/low beams, and flash-to-pass functions. 65 2 Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) 1 — Rotate Headlight Control 2 — Push Fog Light Control 3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control 4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control Multifunction Lever Headlight Switch 1 — Rotate Headlight Control 2 — Push Fog Light Control 3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control 4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control NOTE: Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position. However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake is engaged. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66 66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE To Activate From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light and instrument panel operation.  On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights NOTE: HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH 2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the AUTO position. Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on. 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to the high beam position. Refer to “Multifunction Lever” in this section for further information. AUTOMATIC H IGH B EAM — I F EQUIPPED NOTE: For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch clockwise from the parking light and instrument panel light position to the first detent to turn on the headlights also. Rotate to the second detent, AUTO position, to turn on automatic headlights, parking lights, and instrument panel lights. DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) — I F EQUIPPED The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started. This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is placed in the OFF position. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off. NOTE:  For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog lights are turned on.  If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned on and off using the Uconnect system Ú page 188. may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights are activated). The Automatic High Beam system provides increased forward lighting at night by automatically controlling the high beams through the use of a camera mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. NOTE: Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. 1. Select “Auto Dim High Beams” through the Uconnect system to enable the feature Ú page 188. This system will not activate until the vehicle is at, or above 16 mph (25 km/h). To Deactivate Perform either of the following steps to deactivate the Automatic High Beam system. 1. Deselect “Auto Dim High Beams” through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. 2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights from the high beam to the low beam position. 3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise from the AUTO to the on position. NOTE: Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will stop functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h). 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE FLASH-TO-P ASS You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released. AUTOMATIC H EADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED This system automatically turns your headlights on or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme clockwise position aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position. NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the Automatic mode. HEADLIGHTS O N WITH WIPERS — I F E QUIPPED When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and the engine is running, the headlights will automatically turn on when the wiper system is also turned on. Headlights on when windshield wipers are on may be found on vehicles equipped with an automatic headlight system. NOTE: The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY — IF E QUIPPED This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle. To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights are still on. The 90 second delay interval begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are turned back on or the ignition is placed in the ON position, the delay will be cancelled. 67 When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds or not remain on. You can change the timer setting through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner. NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45 seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this feature. LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER If the headlights or the parking lights are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the vehicle will chime when the driver's door is opened. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68 68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED TURN SIGNALS BATTERY SAVER To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and push the headlight switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob a second time will turn the front fog lights off. Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation. Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery. NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. Turn Signal Warning If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound and a message will display in the cluster to alert the driver. LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED Fog Light Switch Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off. After 10 minutes, if the ignition is in the OFF position, and any door is left open or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome light on position, the interior lights will automatically turn off. NOTE: Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is placed in the ON position. If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE INTERIOR LIGHTS I NTERIOR C OURTESY L IGHTS The courtesy light switches are used to turn the courtesy lights on/off. Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights — If Equipped Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/ reading lights. The lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob is pushed. The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push the lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle. Push the lens a second time to turn each light off. Dimmer Controls Courtesy Light Switches To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or passenger light switch. NOTE:  Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from discharging once the doors are closed.  If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. 69 2 Dimmer Controls 1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control 2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch, and are located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument cluster lights. Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the interior light levels of the ambient lighting on the instrument panel and doors. Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) 1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control 2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70 70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Intermittent Wipers At the top detent of the instrument panel dimmer, all the interior lights will illuminate. At the bottom most setting (extreme bottom) interior lights are turned off (dome off), and the cluster, radio and instrument lighting go to their lowest dimmable setting. WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the right side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. To turn the windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within the lever all the way down to OFF. Windshield Wiper Operation 1 — Pull For Front Washer 2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation 3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation 4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer 5 — Push Up For Mist CAUTION! Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park” position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the switch at the end of the wiper lever to the first detent position, and then turn the switch at the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. Windshield Washers To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate several cycles, then turn off. WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Mist  Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili- Push the lever upward to the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle.  The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and NOTE: The Mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. For information on wiper care and replacement, see Ú page 320. RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF E QUIPPED This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper lever to one of the four detent positions to activate this feature. The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position 4 is the most sensitive. NOTE:  The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high position.  The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop- erly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the windshield. cone may reduce rain sensor performance. off through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the following conditions:  Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first placed in the ON position, when the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature rises above freezing.  Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON, when the transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position. 71  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist. REAR WIPER AND WASHER The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the middle of the lever. Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent for intermittent operation and to the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation. Rear Window Washer Operation Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the rear window washer. If the lever is pushed while on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72 72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CLIMATE CONTROLS AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS Max A/C Button Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit. NOTE: The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen. A/C Button Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display Automatic Temperature Controls Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on. NOTE:  If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.  If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost Mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass. Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display Automatic Temperature Controls  If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost Mode and adjust blower speed if needed. Recirculation Button Press and release the Recirculation button on the touchscreen, or press the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may automatically adjust to optimize customer experience for warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE AUTO Button Set your desired temperature and press the AUTO button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically adjusting the blower speed and air distribution. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO operation to improve performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:  Press and release this button on the touch- screen the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the Front Defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return to the previous setting. Rear Defrost Button Press and release the Rear Defrost Control button on the touchscreen or push and release the button on the faceplate to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.  Push the button on the faceplate CAUTION! 73 Front Temperature Control These buttons provide the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. NOTE: Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic mode Ú page 82. Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: The temperature can also be adjusted by pressing the Temperature readout on the top left and right corners of the status bar. Front Defrost Button  Use care when washing the inside of the rear SYNC Button Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.  Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. NOTE: The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74 74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Blower Control Panel Mode Mix Mode Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate control system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.  Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.  Touchscreen:Blower speed can be selected by Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. pressing the blower bar area between the icons. Press the desired blower speed from 1-7. Mode Control The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen. Bi-Level Mode NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button on the touchscreen or push and release the button on the faceplate to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF. Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC panel. To change the rear system settings:  Press the Rear Climate button on the touch- screen to display the rear climate controls. Control functions now operate the rear system.  To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect system, press the Front Climate or Done button on the touchscreen. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE REAR LOCK BUTTON Press and release this button to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings. FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON Press and release the Front button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front Climate Controls. Uconnect 5 With 10.1-in Display Rear Control Screen REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON Press and release the Rear button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls are on. REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL These buttons provide the front occupants with the ability to control the rear temperature. Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to increase the temperature. REAR AUTO BUTTON Press and release the AUTO button on the touchscreen, within the Rear screen, to change the current setting. The REAR AUTO indicator will illuminate when REAR AUTO is on. This feature automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the rear system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Ú page 82. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature. NOTE: When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature. 75 SYNC BUTTON Press the SYNC To Driver button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. NOTE: The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen. BLOWER CONTROL Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate Control system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen. PANEL MODE Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76 76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE BI-LEVEL MODE Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the headliner outlets. change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off. NOTE: The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on the passenger side of the vehicle. AUTO BUTTON The AUTO button automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting distribution and amount of airflow. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Ú page 82. FLOOR MODE Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the floor outlets. REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON Press and release the OFF button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off. Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) system has floor air outlets underneath the passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The system It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL Rear Automatic Climate Controls 1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and the rear modes to suit your comfort needs. 2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE REAR BLOWER CONTROL The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases the blower speed. REAR MODE CONTROL Push this button on the Rear Climate Controls to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers. FLOOR MODE Air comes from the floor outlets. REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/ Blower Off button. MANUAL C LIMATE C ONTROL DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS PANEL MODE In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Press and release the MAX A/C button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. NOTE: The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen. A/C Button Press and release the A/C button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.  For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.  If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side BI-LEVEL MODE NOTE: MAX A/C Button NOTE: Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. 77 Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display Manual Temperature Controls glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.  If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78 78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Recirculation Button Front Defrost Button Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C (Air Conditioning) can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode (if equipped) is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED on the control button to blink and then turn off. Press and release the Front Defrost button to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the Front Defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting. Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:  Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.  Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Front Temperature Control These buttons provide the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. SYNC Button Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. Pressing SYNC on the touchscreen while in the Front Climate screen synchronizes the driver and passenger temperatures only. In order to SYNC rear temperature to driver temperature, the touchscreen must be on the Rear Climate screen. NOTE: The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen. 79 Blower Control Panel Mode Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate Control system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.  Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.  Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. Mode Control The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80 80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF. REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls are on. REAR LOCK BUTTON Press and release this button to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings. FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The Front MTC Display/Touchscreen The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control (MTC) system allows for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the front MTC display/ touchscreen. To change the rear system settings:  Press the Rear Climate button on the touch- screen to display the rear climate controls. The control functions now operate the rear system.  Press the Front Climate button on the touch- screen to return to the front climate controls. Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front Climate Controls. REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL These buttons provide the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to increase the temperature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature. NOTE: When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature moves up and down with the driver’s temperature. SYNC BUTTON Press the SYNC To Driver button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC exits this feature. NOTE: The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen. BLOWER CONTROL Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate Control system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE PANEL MODE Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. BI-LEVEL MODE Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the headliner and floor outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off. Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) system has floor air outlets at the rear right side of the third row seats and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The system provides heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the headliner outlets. The rear system temperature control buttons are located on the headliner on the passenger side of the vehicle. FLOOR MODE Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the floor outlets. Rear Manual Climate Controls 81 CAUTION! Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control system through an intake grille, located in the floor under the passengers’ seats. Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor. REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control up button to raise the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control down button to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82 82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE REAR BLOWER CONTROL NOTE: The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons decreases the blower speed. FLOOR MODE REAR MODE CONTROL Push this button on the Rear Climate Controls to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers. PANEL MODE Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. BI-LEVEL MODE Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Air comes from the floor outlets. REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/ Blower Off button. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) — I F EQUIPPED 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. NOTE:  It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.  The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-programmable feature within the Uconnect system Ú page 188. 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode. 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode. Automatic Operation Manual Operation Override 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CLIMATE VOICE C OMMANDS Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.) Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep, say one of the following commands:  “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”  “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees” Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped. OPERATING T IPS Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions. Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging. Vacation/Storage For information on maintaining the Climate Control system when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of time, see Ú page 357. Window Fogging Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur. Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. Cabin Air Filter The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed. 83 Stop/Start System — If Equipped While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition. Operating Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Set the mode control to Hot Weather (Panel Mode), (A/C) on, and And Vehicle blower on high. Roll down the Interior Is windows for a minute to flush out Very Hot the hot air. Adjust the controls as needed to achieve comfort. Warm Weather Cool Sunny Turn (A/C) on and set the mode control to (Panel Mode). Operate in (Bi-Level Mode). Cool & Humid Conditions Set the mode control to (Floor Mode) and turn (A/C) on to keep windows clear. Cold Weather Set the mode control to (Floor Mode). If windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control to (Mix Mode). 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84 84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle. WARNING! If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury. Overhead Sunglass Storage Instrument Panel Drawer There is a storage drawer located in the lower center of the instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the access button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted once the access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully open position. At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses. From the closed position, push the indentation to open the compartment. Drawer Access Button CAUTION! Release Handle The storage drawer must be closed while driving. If left open during a collision, additional damage may occur to property or the drawer mechanism. Front Door Storage Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for storage. Overhead Sunglass Door Latch The door will slowly rotate to the full open position. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped NOTE: The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on some models.  Push the lock rod inward for the locked 85 position.  Pull outward on the lock rod for the unlocked position. 2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat to open the floor panel. In Floor Storage Bin Front Seatback Storage 1. To access the storage bins with front seats in the rearward position, place the lock rod in the unlocked position so the load floor can fold upwards towards the seatback. Second Row Floor Storage Bins There are removable storage bins (if equipped) located in the areas below the load floor, located in front of the second row seats. Floor Latch Lock Rod 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86 86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched.  Always close the storage bin covers when your  Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin  Do not allow children to have access to the covers open.  Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion.  Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion.  Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. CAUTION! The storage bin cover must lay flat and be latched to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat adjustment may damage the cover. STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: vehicle is unattended. second row seat storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. SEAT STORAGE BIN COVER EMERGENCY RELEASE LEVER As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover has an Emergency Release Lever built into the latching mechanism.  In a collision, serious injury could result if the seat storage bin covers are not properly latched.  Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers open. Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while the vehicle is in motion.  Do not operate the storage bin covers while the vehicle is in motion.  Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down. CAUTION! The storage bin cover must lay flat and be latched to avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to the cover. If the storage bin cover is left in the open position, front seat adjustment may damage the cover. Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE SUN S CREENS — IF E QUIPPED Sun screens are available for second and third row seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels, and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks that the sun screens attach to when pulled out. Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the top of the window. Once the screen is completely to the top of the window, extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks attached to the top of the window. To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward to disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back into the base sill. USB/AUX C ONTROL 2 NOTE:  If a smartphone is plugged into a video USB port, the device will only have charging capability and allow for files/media to be stored, if equipped with Uconnect Theater. will begin charging and is ready for use with the system. Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports can be used at the same time but cannot be used simultaneously while playing media. When both Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports are in use they will be charged at a reduced rate. Sun Screen Extended For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow you to select which device to use. There are numerous USB ports located throughout the vehicle that allow an external USB device to be plugged into the USB port.  Once a device is connected to the USB port, it 87 Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports 1 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 1 2 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 2 3 — AUX Port 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88 88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in this vehicle.  In the center console  On the instrument panel  On the back of the front row seats in the Ucon- nect Theater Media Hubs (if equipped)  On the back of the front row seats  Above the rear cup holder in the third row of seats Rear Seat USB Charging Port Without Uconnect Theater 3rd Row USB Charging Port NOTE: The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery operated USB devices when connected. Different scenarios are listed below when a non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports, and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:  “A new device is now connected. Previous connection was lost”. Charge Only USB In The Center Console NOTE: The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument panel can be switched from ignition only to constant battery powered all the time. See an authorized dealer for details. Rear Seat USB Media Hub With Uconnect Theater 1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only) 2 — HDMI Port 3 — USB Port (Charge Only)  “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection was lost”.  “Another device is in use through the same USB port. Please disconnect the first device to use the second device”. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the connection to a previous device to be lost. NOTE: Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that the device is not supported by the system. POWER O UTLETS Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp) power outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB ports, that can be used to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets can be labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a key symbol are powered when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, while the outlets labeled with a battery symbol are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times. CAUTION! Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Depending on the type of center console your vehicle is equipped with, there is a front power outlet located either on the center stack, bottom of the instrument panel, or inside the center console. 2 12 Volt Front Power Outlet (In Floor Tray) - If Equipped 12 Volt Front Power Outlet (In Center Console) NOTE: All accessories connected to the battery powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge. 89 12 Volt Front Power Outlet (On Center Stack) - If Equipped 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90 90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power outlet located in the rear cargo area. WARNING!  Close the lid when not in use and while driving The rear power outlet is located in the right rear cargo area. the vehicle.  If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. CAUTION!  Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Power Outlet Fuse Locations Rear Power Outlet power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 1 — F95A (Ignition)/F95B (Battery) Front Power Outlet 10A 2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A 3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet can be changed to battery powered at all times by switching the power outlet fuse in the Power Distribution Center panel from fuse location F95A to F95B.  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death:  Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.  Do not touch with wet hands. (Continued) coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.  After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located on the right side of the vehicle, before the third row of seats to convert DC current to AC current. The Power Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain video game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools. The Power Inverter turns on when the device is plugged in, and the ignition is in ON/RUN position. It turns off when the device is unplugged or the ignition is no longer in ON/RUN position. 91 WIRELESS C HARGING PAD — I F E QUIPPED The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the Power Inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the Power Inverter, it resets. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the Power Inverter. 2 WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death:  Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.  Do not touch with wet hands.  Close the lid when not in use.  If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an Power Inverter electric shock and failure. Wireless Charging Pad Location Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi wireless charging pad located inside of the storage area below the climate controls. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that allows wireless charging of your mobile phone. Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi wireless charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please see your phone’s owner’s manual for further information. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92 92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place, and an LED indicator light. LED Indicator Status:  No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a device. WINDOWS POWER W INDOWS The window switches on the driver’s door trim panel control all of the door windows.  Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.  Red Light/Flashing: Internal error or foreign object is detected. Window Lockout Switch NOTE:  All vehicle doors must be closed for the wireless The window switches will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and during power accessory delay. charging pad to operate.  Using a phone case may interfere with wireless charging. NOTE: CAUTION! Driver’s Power Window Controls The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and prevents the vehicle from starting. The driver may lock out the rear power windows by pushing the bar control just below the power window controls. Power Window controls will also remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been placed in the OFF position, depending upon the accessory delay setting. Opening a front door will cancel this feature. There is a single control on the front passenger’s door trim panel which operates the passenger door window and a set of controls that lock and unlock all doors. The controls will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and during power accessory delay. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Sliding Side Door Power Window Control — If Equipped Second row passengers may open and close the sliding door window by a single control on the door handle assembly. The controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and during power accessory delay. NOTE: The controls will not operate if the driver has activated the Power Window Lockout. AUTOMATIC WINDOW F EATURES Auto-Down Feature The driver and front passenger door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch down to the second detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch briefly. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection Lift the window switch up to the second detent, and release; the window will go up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly and release it when you want the window to stop. Sliding Door Power Window Control (Left Side Shown) NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open, stopping several inches above the window sill. If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. 93 NOTE: Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the window manually. WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the window path before closing. RESET AUTO-U P Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up: 1. Pull the window control up to close the window completely and continue to hold the control up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94 94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WIND B UFFETING Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the left between the sun visors on the overhead console. The Power Shade switch is located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console. WARNING!  In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.  Do not allow small children to operate the Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade Switches 1 — Sunroof Switch 2 — Power Shade Switch 3 — Vent Button sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. OPENING A ND CLOSING THE SUNROOF Express Open/Close WARNING!  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. (Continued) Push the open switch and release it within one second. The sunroof will open automatically from any position and stop at the full open position. This is called Express Open. Push the close switch and release it within one second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Close. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Express Open/Close  During Express Open or Express Close opera- Push the sunshade open switch and release it within one second and the sunshade will open to the half-open position and stop automatically. Push and release the sunshade open switch again from the half-open position and the sunshade will open to the full-open position and stop automatically. This is called Express Open. tion, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.  If the sunshade is in the closed position when the open switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening. Manual Open/Close Push and hold the open switch and the sunroof will open to the full open position. To close the sunroof, push and hold the close switch. Any release of the switch during open or close operation will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially open condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again. OPENING A ND CLOSING THE POWER SUNSHADE — IF E QUIPPED The sunshade has two programmed open positions: half-open and full-open. When opening the sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade will always stop at the half-open position regardless of express or manual open operation. The switch must be actuated again to continue to the full-open position. Push the sunshade close switch and release it within one second and the sunshade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is completely closed, the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called Express Close. NOTE:  During Express Open or Express Close opera- tion, any movement of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.  If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again will automatically close both the sunroof and shade completely. Manual Open/Close Push and hold the sunshade open switch and the shade will open to the half-open position and stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade open switch again and the shade will open automatically to the full-open position. 95 To close the shade, push and hold the sunshade close switch. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed again. PINCH PROTECT F EATURE This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode. VENTING SUNROOF Push and release the Vent button within one second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96 96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE I GNITION OFF OPERATION 4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert it into the seat located on the underside of the hood. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. NOTE:  Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms NOTE: are not in motion and not in the lifted position. Ignition off time is programmable through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. SUNROOF M AINTENANCE Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any debris that may have collected in the tracks. HOOD  While lifting the hood, use both hands.  Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector Hood Release Lever 2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle. 3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is located behind the center front edge of the hood. OPENING must be in PARK. CLOSING If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. 1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the other hand remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert it into the locking tab. 2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely closed. If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. The hood release lever (to open the primary latch) and safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must be released to open the hood. WARNING! 1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s side of the instrument panel. Safety Latch Release Lever Location Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! WARNING! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.  Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.  If you are required to drive with the liftgate LIFTGATE TO UNLOCK/O PEN THE LIFTGATE The liftgate may be released in several ways:  Key fob  Liftgate Release Handle  Button on overhead console Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to release the liftgate. The key fob and the overhead console button will release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling the electronic liftgate release handle will unlock and release the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate. 97 Electronic Liftgate 1 — Electronic Liftgate Release Handle 2 — Passive Entry Lock Button NOTE: When you push the Passive Entry button, either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect system Ú page 188. TO LOCK/CLOSE THE L IFTGATE To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate closing handle and pull in a downward motion. With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located to the right of the outside handle to lock the vehicle. open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. POWER L IFTGATE — IF E QUIPPED The power liftgate may be opened or closed in several ways:  Overhead console liftgate button  Key fob  Outside handle (opens liftgate only)  Rear Interior Power Liftgate button (when liftgate is open)  Hands-Free Liftgate (if equipped) — opens liftgate only 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98 98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Using the above ways to open or close the liftgate:  When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will open  When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will close  When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will reverse Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead console to open or close the liftgate. Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within five seconds to open or close the liftgate. The key fob and the overhead console button will operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the touch pad on the outside handle or Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate handle.  To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if equipped) requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect system.  Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed with liftgate movements. These alerts can be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings Ú page 188. Overhead Console Power Switches The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Interior Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening. NOTE:  When you push the Passive Entry button, either 1 — Liftgate 2 — Left Sliding Door 3 — Sliding Door Power Off 4 — Right Sliding Door To Close The Liftgate Rear Interior Power Liftgate Button To Lock The Vehicle With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry lock button located to the right of the outside handle will lock the vehicle. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE HANDS-FREE L IFTGATE — IF E QUIPPED Vehicles Equipped With A Trailer Tow Package NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Package, the hands-free activation zone(s) for the Power Liftgate will be located on the left and right side of the receiver. Use a straight kicking motion under either activation zone to open the Hands-Free Liftgate. Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone To open the liftgate using hands-free activation, use a straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle activation zone in the general location below the liftgate door handle. Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the motion. 99 NOTE: To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any kicks. CAUTION! The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings. The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be turned off during jacking, tire changing, and vehicle service Ú page 188. NOTE:  The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when the transmission is in PARK.  If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate Hands-Free Liftgate Trailer Tow Activation Zones When a valid kicking motion is completed, the liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate will open after approximately one second. This assumes all options are enabled in the Uconnect system. while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.  There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100 100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE  If the power liftgate encounters multiple Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.  The power liftgate will release, but not power NOTE: obstructions within the same cycle, the system will automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be operated manually. open, in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before opening the liftgate.  If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset power liftgate functionality.  The Hands-Free Liftgate only works to open the liftgate. WARNING!  Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.  If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse its direction. WARNING! During power operation, personal injury or cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away. CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Area Storage When the third row seats are not in the stowed position, there is a large area for cargo storage. Rear Cargo Area NOTE: With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft (1.2 x 2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit on the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The front seats must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position. Stow ‘n Vac Integrated Vacuum — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an integrated vacuum system. This vacuum is for in-vehicle use only and should only be used on dry materials and on in-vehicle surfaces. It is located in the rear trim panel behind the sliding door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read all instructions before using. When using your vacuum, basic precautions should be followed, including the following: WARNING! with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in either the ACC position, or engine running (ON), unless you are using the vacuum system. Be aware a child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle when the vacuum system is in use. ALWAYS push ignition button to place ignition in the OFF position when finished using the vacuum system. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or death:  Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in motion or while driving. WARNING!  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or 101  Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.  Do not use to vacuum up anything outside of the vehicle.  Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such as gasoline, or use around explosive vapors. Vapors from flammable liquids may form an explosive mixture with air and can be ignited by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel to a source of ignition and explode.  Do not vacuum anything that is burning or smoking, such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes/embers.  Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close atten- tion is necessary when used by or near children.  Do not leave the vacuum running while unat- tended.  Use only as described in this manual. Use only attachments provided with your vehicle. (Continued)  Do not put any object into openings. Do not use with any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint, hair, and anything that may reduce air flow.  Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlorine bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.  Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.  Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of body away from openings and moving parts.  Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that the filter is in place and in good condition. WARNING! This equipment incorporates parts such as switches, motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks that can cause an explosion. When using your vacuum near gasoline-dispensing equipment or service stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away from the exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump. The vacuum is mounted more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground level in your vehicle. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102 102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE The vacuum will operate in two modes:  Ignition in the ACC position: Engine remains off, and vacuum usage is limited to 10 minutes.  Ignition in the START position: Engine is running, and vacuum usage is unlimited until the vehicle’s battery level falls below 60%. NOTE: The vacuum will not operate when the ignition is in the OFF position, or in the ON/RUN position with the engine off. For more information on ignition positions, see Ú page 18. 1. Before Using Vacuum: Accessory (ACC) Mode Operation - For up to 10 minutes of operation Always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push ignition button to place ignition in Accessory (ACC) mode. The engine will not be running in this mode. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. NOTE: The vacuum system will run for 10 minutes off battery power and then the vacuum will shut down. A low battery indication light (LOW PWR) located below the vacuum nozzle storage location will come on one minute before the vacuum shuts down. Engine Running (START) Operation - For more than 10 minutes of operation 2. Unclip the vacuum nozzle and pull to extend vacuum hose from the storage location.  Position vehicle outdoors and fully open all NOTE: side windows.  Always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and leave engine running. The hose can reach every corner of the vehicle floor. 3. Install desired attachment if needed. WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases can cause serious injury or death. Follow these precautions to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:  Do not inhale exhaust gases.  Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Always position vehicle outdoors and fully open all side windows before using vacuum system with the engine running.  Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Front Storage Compartments 1 — Vacuum Nozzle Storage Location 2 — Attachment Compartment 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: WARNING! To access crevice or upholstery attachments, open the front Attachment Compartment.  Crevice Tool — Able to reach into tight spaces including the seat latches located in the floor.  Do not vacuum any flammable liquids, such as gasoline, or use around explosive vapors. Vapors from flammable liquids may form an explosive mixture with air and can be ignited by heat, sparks, or flames. Vapors may travel to a source of ignition and explode.  Upholstery Tool — Use to agitate dirt and debris from carpets and seats. This tool can also be used to pick up pet hair.  Hose Extension — Use to add another 12 ft (3.6 m) of usable length to the vacuum hose. Hose extension is provided in a bag attached to a grocery hook behind the third row seat on the driver’s side. 4. Push the vacuum on/off button located under the vacuum nozzle storage location. Use vacuum as needed. NOTE:  When the vacuum is ON, the LED indicator on the on/off button will illuminate.  Do not vacuum anything that is burning or Power Buttons smoking, such as cigarettes, matches, or hot ashes/embers. 1 — Low Power Indicator Light 2 — On/Off Button  Do not allow to be used as a toy. Close atten- tion is necessary when used by or near children. WARNING! For in vehicle use ONLY. To reduce the risk of fire, serious injury or death:  Do not use vacuum while vehicle is in motion or while driving.  When the vacuum is OFF, the LED indicator will also be off.  After nine minutes of operation in ACC mode (engine not running), the Low Power Indicator Light (LOW PWR) will illuminate. 103  Do not vacuum wet surfaces or any liquids.  Do not use to vacuum up anything outside of the vehicle. (Continued)  Do not leave the vacuum running while unat- tended.  Use only as described in this manual. Use only attachments provided with your vehicle.  Do not put any object into openings. Do not use with any opening blocked; keep free of dust, lint, hair, and anything that may reduce air flow. (Continued) 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104 104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!  Do not vacuum toxic material such as chlorine bleach, ammonia, drain cleaner, etc.  Do not vacuum hard or sharp objects such as glass, nails, screws, coins, etc.  Keep hair, loose clothing, fingers, and all parts of body away from openings and moving parts.  Only use with filter in place. Periodically check that the filter is in place and in good condition. WARNING! This equipment incorporates parts such as switches, motors, or the like that tend to produce arcs or sparks that can cause an explosion. When using your vacuum near gasoline-dispensing equipment or service stations, park vehicle at least 20 ft (6 m) away from the exterior enclosure of any dispensing pump. The vacuum is mounted more than 18 inches (45 cm) above ground level in your vehicle. 5. When finished, push power button to turn vacuum off and store vacuum hose and any attachments. 6. Before exiting the vehicle:  If the ignition is in the ACC position, push the START/STOP ignition button to place ignition in the OFF position, remove key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.  If the engine is running, raise all of the windows, push the START/STOP ignition button to place ignition in the OFF position, remove key fob from the vehicle, close all of the doors and the liftgate and lock the vehicle.  If there are any other issues with your vacuum, contact an authorized dealer. Your vacuum has no user serviceable parts. Debris Bin The debris bin is located behind the access panel behind the third row seat on the driver’s side. To Empty 1. Push power button to turn vacuum OFF. 2. Open the access panel by pulling the finger grip towards you and then pull downward. Vacuum Troubleshooting  DO NOT use with any opening blocked. If an object becomes lodged in the hose, attempt to fully extend the hose in a straight line while the vacuum motor is running. If this does not dislodge the object, turn the vacuum OFF and remove the hose from the vehicle using the subsequent removal instructions. If the filter is clogged, follow the emptying debris bin procedure and lightly tap the filter on the collection bin to remove any collected debris from the filter. Both the bin and the filter can be rinsed with water if needed. To avoid mold and stale odors, allow both to dry completely before reinstalling in your vehicle. If the filter has tears, holes or other damage and needs to be replaced, please contact an authorized dealer. Vacuum System Access Panel 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 3. Twist the release knob counterclockwise and pull the bin towards you. 105 Hose Access Port The hose access port is located behind the access panel behind the third row seat on the driver’s side. To Remove Vacuum Hose For Cleaning 2 1. Open the access panel. Vacuum Hose Release Lever 3. Return to vacuum nozzle storage location located behind the sliding door. Debris Bin Release Knob 4. Remove the filter and dump the debris in a trash can. Lightly tap the filter on the collection bin to remove loose debris from the filter. If the filter is clogged from extended use, have the filter replaced by an authorized dealer. 5. Reverse the procedure to reinstall. NOTE: The debris bin must be fully installed and locked for the vacuum to function properly. 4. Grab the vacuum nozzle and gently pull the hose out through vacuum nozzle storage location. Vacuum System Access Panel 2. Open the small access panel on the upper right side, and unclip the hose from the hose access port by pushing the yellow vacuum hose release lever with right thumb and lifting the hose with index finger. 5. Shake the hose to remove any objects stuck in the hose. Take care not to perforate the hose while attempting to dislodge any objects. 6. Reverse the procedure to reinstall and clip the hose into place. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106 106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED The Stow ‘N Place roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity. The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars. DEPLOYING T HE CROSSBARS The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached. 1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends of the crossbar and lift the crossbar from its stowed position in the side rail. Repeat with crossbar on the opposite side. NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed. Removing Crossbars CAUTION! Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle. Roof Rack 1 — Side Rail 2 — Crossbar Thumb Screw 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end, taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint. Slide the thumb screw down. 3. Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on the side rail. 107 4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both thumb screws completely. 2 Bending Pivot Positioning Crossbars Installing Crossbars 5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the deployment of the crossbars. NOTE: The crossbars are not identical and have fixed deployment positions. Rear crossbar can be deployed in two different positions. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108 108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE STOWING T HE C ROSSBARS 1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb screws at both ends. Lift the crossbar away from the matching letter to remove it from the deployed position. Repeat with the other crossbar. 3. Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail. Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the matching letters on the side rail. 5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the thumb screws completely. CAUTION! Use care when removing and handling the crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle. 2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot supports at each end. Stowing Crossbars 4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail. Tightening Crossbar 6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the opposite side. Crossbar Pivot Crossbar To Side Rail Stowed Crossbars 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE:  To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the side rails when they are not in use.  If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. WARNING! Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack. CAUTION! 109 CAUTION!  To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the crossbars deployed. The load should be secured and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof, place a blanket or other protective layer between the load and the roof surface.  To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.  Load should always be secured to cross bars first, with tie down loops used as additional securing points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps and thumb wheels frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached. (Continued)  Long loads that extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.  Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle. 2 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110 110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111 3 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112 112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS 1. Tachometer  Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). 2. Instrument Cluster Display  When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the instrument cluster display messages Ú page 113.  The display shows one of the main menu WARNING! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reaches “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the gauge drops back into the normal range and is no longer red. If the gauge remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. items after the ignition is turned/placed on. WARNING! 3. Speedometer  Indicates vehicle speed. 4. Temperature Gauge  The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.  The gauge can indicate a higher tempera- ture when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats Ú page 324. 5. Fuel Gauge  The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.  The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located. NOTE: The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF position (and the key removed, for vehicles with mechanical key), opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY L OCATION AND CONTROLS The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped with an instrument cluster display (base or premium cluster), which offers useful information to the driver. The instrument cluster display controls allows the driver to select information by pushing the directional buttons mounted on the steering wheel: 113  Back / Left Arrow Button Push and release the left arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.  Up Arrow Button Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the Main Menu items.  Right Arrow Button Push and release the right arrow button to access the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item.  Down Arrow Button Instrument Cluster Display Controls Instrument Cluster Display Location 1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls 2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen 1 — Left Arrow Button 2 — Up Arrow Button 3 — Right Arrow Button 4 — Down Arrow Button 5 — OK Button Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the Main Menu items.  OK Button Push the OK button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset. 3 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114 114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ENGINE OIL LIFE  Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate it is time to change the engine oil. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.  Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.  To reset the oil change indicator after performing the scheduled maintenance, refer to the following procedure. NOTE: This procedure should only be performed after scheduled maintenance is completed. Resetting oil life other than when associated with a scheduled maintenance may result in damage due to not properly maintaining the engine oil. Oil Life Reset Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the vehicle.) 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument cluster display menu screen. 3. Push and release the down arrow button to access the ”Vehicle Info” menu screen. 4. Push the left arrow button or right arrow button to access the “Oil Life” submenu. 5. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to 100%. 6. Push the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster display menu screen. 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds. 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in the OFF position. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115 KEYSENSE C LUSTER M ESSAGES — IF EQUIPPED When the KeySense key is in use there will be:  Continuous, dedicated telltale  Unique Display Splash Screen 3 With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated messages shown in the following table: Setting None – With vehicle ignition ON Max Vehicle Speed Instrument Cluster Display Message “KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”  “Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime  “Approaching max speed xx MPH/km/h” supported by a chime Start Up Fuel Alert message “Range to empty xxx miles or km” Early Low Fuel Alert Message “Fuel Low” ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use” Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use” Forward Collision Warning “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use” 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116 116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY MENU I TEMS The instrument cluster display can be used to view the main menu items for several features. Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through the driver interactive display menu options until the desired menu is reached Ú page 113. NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle features. Speedometer Push and release the up or down arrow button until Speedometer is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle between MPH and km/h. Vehicle Info Push and release the up or down arrow button until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll through the following information submenus: Tire Pressure Oil Life If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON. Displays the remaining engine oil life as a percentage. If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different color than the other tire pressure value. If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed. Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset Ú page 236. Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature. Transmission Temp Displays the actual transmission temperature. Oil Temp — If Equipped Displays the actual oil temperature. Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure. To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the OK button. The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be displayed at all times, but the following conditions will need to be met in order to reset Oil Life:  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position. If the conditions are met, holding the OK button will reset the gauge and the numeric display will return to 100%. If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message will display for five seconds, describing the required conditions, and then the Oil Life screen will reappear. Battery Voltage Displays the actual battery voltage. Engine Hours — If Equipped Displays the number of hours of engine operation. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117 Driver Assist — If Equipped Trip Info Messages Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Driver Assist display icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push the left or right arrow button to scroll through the Trip A and Trip B submenus. The Trip information will display the following: Push and release the up or down arrow button until Messages is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Fuel Economy Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The Fuel Economy Menu will display the following:  Two submenu pages that can be toggled between using the left and right arrow buttons; one with Current Value displayed and one without the Current Value displayed:  Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)  Range To Empty (miles or km)  Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)  The Max and Min values will correspond to the particular engine requirements  Hold OK to reset average fuel economy informa- tion.  Distance  Average Fuel Economy  Elapsed Time Hold the OK button to reset feature information. NOTE: The pop-up messages indicate the status of the system and/or the conditions that need to be met. Messages remain in the stored stack until condition is cleared. Stop / Start – If Equipped Screen Setup Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed. Audio Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio Menu displays in the instrument cluster display. 3 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118 118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options: Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options: Lower Left Upper Center None Compass Outside Temp Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Audio/Phone Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Digital Speed Time Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) None Time Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Compass Outside Temp Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Average (L/100km, or km/L) Current (L/100km, or km/L) Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options: Menu Title Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options: None Lower Right None Upper Center  Cancel Upper Left Trip B Distance Trip A Distance Premium Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options: Defaults  Restore Compass Outside Temp Time Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Trip B Distance Trip A Distance Compass Outside Temp Time Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Trip B Distance Trip A Distance Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options: Upper Right Odometer (Premium Instrument Cluster) None Compass Outside Temp Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)  Show  Hide (Odometer will still appear when door is open) Time 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options: Upper Right Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Trip B Distance Trip A Distance Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options: Center None Compass Outside Temp Time Range Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L) Trip A Distance Trip B Distance Audio Menu Title Menu Title Defaults  Restore  Cancel Digital Speed Speed Warning — If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow button until Speed Warning is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the OK button to enter Speed Warning. Use the up or down arrow button to turn the Speed Warning ON or OFF, then push and release the OK button to confirm the selection. If the ON status is selected, use the up or down arrow button to set the desired speed, then push the OK button to set the speed for the Speed Warning. A Speed Warning light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, with a number matching the set speed, with a pop-up message to inform the driver that the Speed Warning has been set to the desired speed. Each time the set speed is exceeded, a single chime will sound and a pop-up warning message will display. If the set speed is exceeded more than 2 mph (3 km/h), a continuous chime will sound for up to 10 seconds, or until the speed is no longer exceeded. The telltale in the instrument cluster will also change from white to yellow, and a pop-up warning message will pop-up on the instrument cluster display. NOTE: Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense is in use. 119 BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery. In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential 12 Volt electrical loads. Load reduction will be functional when the vehicle propulsion system is active. The vehicle may not be running depending on the High Voltage (HV) battery State Of Charge (SOC) or temperature. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle. When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster display. These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain. 3 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120 120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE:  The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously.  If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system Ú page 121. The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be effected by load reduction:  Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel  Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped  Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors  HVAC System  115 Volts AC Power Inverter System  Audio and Telematics System Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:  The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly.  Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).  Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.  Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods).  The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months).  The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely.  The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked.  The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and similar devices. What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode”) During a trip:  Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:  Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)  Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports  Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)  Check the audio settings (volume) After a trip:  Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents).  Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time).  The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL TRIP COMPUTER The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the up or down arrow button until “Trip Info” is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Navigate between Trip A or Trip B by using the right and left arrow buttons. For each trip the following information will be displayed: Trip A  Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset.  Shows the Average MPG for Trip A since the last reset.  Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. Trip B  Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset.  Shows the Average MPG for Trip B since the last reset.  Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position. To Reset A Trip Function Push and hold the OK button to reset the currently displayed trip. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. 121 RED WARNING LIGHTS Air Bag Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Battery Charge Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component. 3 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122 122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Brake Warning Light This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed. This indicator will reflect which doors are open. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the Electric Power Steering (EPS) system Ú page 143. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the ETC system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. This warning light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool; whichever comes first. NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time. If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service Ú page 303. Hood Open Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left open and not fully closed. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. 123 Liftgate Open Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is open. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime. Oil Pressure Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Oil Temperature Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels. 3 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124 124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound Ú page 239. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally. WARNING! YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light — If Equipped CAUTION! Electronic Park Brake Warning Light Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security system is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer for service Ú page 147. This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light This warning light monitors the ABS. The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will indicate when the ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi- cator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ RUN position.  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.  This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light indicates the ESC is off. Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense system is not operating and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer. LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The warning light will flash when the vehicle is crossing the lane marker Ú page 166. Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.85 gal (7 L) this warning light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added. A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning. 125 Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will illuminate and a single chime will sound when the windshield washer fluid is low. Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs. 3 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126 126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. CAUTION! Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. Service AWD Warning Light — If Equipped This telltale will turn on to indicate that the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly and that service is required. Contact an authorized dealer. Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the FCW or PEB Warning System. Contact an authorized dealer for service Ú page 233. Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer for service Ú page 143. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire. CAUTION! Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked. YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is off. 127 GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Vehicle Detected Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and the vehicle in front is detected Ú page 147. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control speed is SET and there is no vehicle in front detected Ú page 147. Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is set to the desired speed Ú page 146. Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. 3 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128 128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped The KeySense indicator is illuminated when a KeySense key is detected upon startup of the vehicle. The indicator will remain lit for the entire key cycle as a reminder that the KeySense key is in use. While the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond to settings associated with the KeySense profile Ú page 14. LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” and ready to provide visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs Ú page 166. Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate when the parking lights or headlights are turned on. Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode Ú page 143. Turn Signal Indicator Lights LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right). When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed, the LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid white. This occurs when only left, right, or neither lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the detected lane line Ú page 166. NOTE:  A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.  Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when the vehicle equipped with ACC has been turned on but not set Ú page 147. Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is ready, but not set Ú page 146. Speed Warning Indicator Light The white indicator will illuminate along with a pop-up message (Speed Warning Set to XX followed by unit), once the feature is enabled. When the set speed is exceeded, a continuous chime (up to 10 seconds or until the speed is no longer exceeded) will sound along with a Speed Warning Exceeded pop-up message and the indicator light will turn yellow and flash. NOTE: The number “31” is only an example of a speed that can be selected. Set Speed Display The Set Speed Display indicator light indicates the set speed for the Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) settings. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS High Beam Indicator Light This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario. ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION!  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need 129 to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system Ú page 187. WARNING!  ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.  If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:  Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.  Access, or allow others to access, infor- mation stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information. 3 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130 130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine. NOTE: For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131 131 STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. WARNING!  Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death.  When exiting the vehicle, always remove the Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with NORMAL STARTING  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. access to an unlocked vehicle. is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/ RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions; OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. To change the ignition positions without starting the vehicle and to use the accessories, follow these steps:  Start with the ignition in the OFF position.  Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC position (instrument cluster will display “ACC”).  Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”). 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.  Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third 3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. NOTE: 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again. time to return the ignition to the OFF position (instrument cluster will display “OFF”). Only press one pedal at a time while driving the vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simultaneously, a warning message will display in the instrument cluster Ú page 113. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132 132 STARTING AND OPERATING AUTOPARK AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with placing the vehicle in PARK under certain situations. It is a back-up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages. WARNING!  Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster display and near the gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.  AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster display and on the gear selector. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake. If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver attempts to turn off the engine, if certain conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The gear selector will automatically reset itself to the PARK position. The vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF position (engine off). When AutoPark is activated the instrument cluster will display the message “AutoPark Engaged”. AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met: If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, if certain conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, automatically shifting the vehicle’s transmission to the PARK position. The Electric Park Brake SAFE HOLD feature will also activate in some conditions Ú page 138. CAUTION! Engine will remain running. AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:  Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector  Vehicle is not in PARK  Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less  Vehicle is not in PARK  Driver’s door is ajar  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less  Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled  Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP  Brake pedal is not pressed button The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in the instrument cluster. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133 STARTING AND OPERATING AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode  AutoPark will engage when all of these condi- tions are met:  Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector  Vehicle is not in PARK  Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less  Driver’s door is ajar  Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is not pressed The message “AutoPark Engaged” will display in the instrument cluster. WARNING!  Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. (Continued) WARNING! 133 WARNING!  Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.  The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued)  Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134 134 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may Park. Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: PARK will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P” will display in the instrument cluster display if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). The gear position indicator will blink continuously until the gear selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed. the vehicle has come to a complete stop.  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch momentarily. WARNING! If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) when the driver shifts into PARK, the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) and the above conditions are met, enabling AutoPark. A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. COLD WEATHER OPERATION (B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from an authorized dealer) is recommended. AFTER S TARTING — WARMING UP THE ENGINE The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up. I F E NGINE F AILS T O S TART WARNING!  Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.  Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.  If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Ú page 300. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135 STARTING AND OPERATING TO TURN O FF THE E NGINE USING ENGINE START/STOP B UTTON 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll. NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON/RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required. The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood, behind to the passenger’s side headlamp. Follow these steps to properly use the engine block heater: 1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the passenger’s side headlamp). 2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the heater cord in place. 3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension cord. 4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow it away behind the passenger’s side headlamp. 135 NOTE:  The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available from an authorized dealer.  The engine block heater will require 110 Volt AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.  The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136 136 STARTING AND OPERATING While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades Ú page 315. CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. PARKING BRAKE ELECTRIC P ARK B RAKE (EPB) Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers simple operation, and some additional features that make the parking brake more convenient and useful. The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. You can engage the parking brake in two ways;  Manually, by applying the EPB switch. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.  Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature in the customer programmable features Ú page 188. The EPB is located in the integrated center stack. Electric Park Brake Switch To apply the parking brake manually, push the switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the parking brake, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be applied even when the ignition switch is OFF, however, it can only be released when the ignition switch in the ACC or ON/RUN position. NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137 STARTING AND OPERATING If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking brake will automatically engage whenever the transmission is placed into PARK. Once the parking brake is engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging. The parking brake will release automatically when the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the driver seat belt is buckled and an attempt is made to drive the vehicle away by pressing the accelerator pedal. To release the parking brake manually, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from the back of the vehicle while the parking brake disengages. You may also notice a small amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish. NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! 137 WARNING!  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.  Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.  Always fully apply the parking brake when  Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. (Continued) leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.  Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system. CAUTION! If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138 138 STARTING AND OPERATING If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to engage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion, push on the EPB switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the vehicle remains in motion. To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the parking brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the parking brake will remain engaged. In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp flashing. In this case, urgent service of the EPB system is required. Do not rely on the parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary. Auto Park Brake The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection through the customer programmable features Ú page 188. SafeHold SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no attempt to press the brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the parking brake will automatically engage to prevent the vehicle from rolling. SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB while the driver door is open and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF position and back to ON again. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily by entering Brake Service in your vehicle Ú page 188. This menu-based system will guide you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform rear brake service. Brake Service has requirements that must be met in order to be activated:  The vehicle must be at a standstill.  The parking brake must be unapplied.  The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. While in Brake Service, the EPB fault lamp will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON. When brake service work is complete, the following steps must be followed to reset the parking brake system to normal operation: Brake Service Mode  Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. We recommend having your brakes serviced by an authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.  Press the brake pedal with moderate force. When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can only be done after retracting the EPB actuator.  Apply the EPB. WARNING! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139 STARTING AND OPERATING AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING! You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. WARNING!  Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.  Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.  The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle. (Continued) 139 WARNING!  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.  Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. (Continued)  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140 140 STARTING AND OPERATING I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK 9-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF position. The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions. Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed. The transmission gear range (PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. Push down on the gear selector and then rotate it, to access the L position. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving. NOTE: The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle. BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). The 9-speed transmission has been developed to meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize NINTH gear only in very specific driving situations and conditions. Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed. The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; Transmission Gear Selector 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141 STARTING AND OPERATING GEAR RANGES Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. When exiting the vehicle, always:  Apply the parking brake.  Shift the transmission into PARK.  Turn the ignition off.  Remove the key fob from the vehicle. CAUTION!  Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.  DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position: 141 NEUTRAL (N) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle. WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.  Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.  With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. For Recreational Towing Ú page 184. For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 306. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142 142 STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVE (D) LOW (L) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. Use this range for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the Transmission Temperature Warning Light will illuminate, a warning message will appear in the instrument cluster, and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm Ú page 142. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns off. 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required. Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until the engine and/or transmission is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will function normally once the powertrain is sufficiently warm. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143 STARTING AND OPERATING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive (AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional driving skills required. Under normal driving conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels. Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics. CAUTION! noise, and assists an onboard frequency generator, which creates counteracting sound waves in the audio system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and during drive. POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will provide increased vehicle response and ease of maneuverability. The power steering system adapts to different driving conditions. WARNING! Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this indicates an over temperature condition in the power steering system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off Ú page 121. Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation system. This system is designed to address exhaust and engine noise. The system relies on four microphones embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust and engine If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING" or "POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the All wheels must have the same size and type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size may cause premature wear of the driveline components. 143 vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance Ú page 121. NOTE:  Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers.  The power steering system is fully electric; it requires no power steering fluid.  If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for service. STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal, pressing the accelerator pedal or shifting out of DRIVE (D) will automatically re-start the engine. This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts to handle the additional engine starts. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144 144 STARTING AND OPERATING AUTOSTOP MODE The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every driver key start. At that time, the system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE. To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following Must Occur:  The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument cluster within the Stop/Start section Ú page 121. POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE D OES N OT AUTOSTOP Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start and ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/ Start screen. Situations when the engine will not stop include (but not limited to):  If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the Stop/ Start OFF button.  The vehicle must be completely stopped.  Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.  The gear selector must be in a forward gear and  Driver’s door is not closed. the brake pedal pressed. The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to the zero position and the Stop/Start telltale will illuminate indicating you are in Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained throughout the Auto Stop/Start process.  Battery temperature is too warm or cold.  Battery charge is low. During this time a message will display “Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging”.  The vehicle is on a steep grade.  Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an acceptable cabin temperature has not been achieved.  HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower speed.  HVAC is set to MAX A/C.  Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.  The transmission is not in a forward gear.  Hood is open.  Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres- sure.  Accelerator pedal input.  Engine temp is too high.  5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been achieved from previous Autostop.  Steering angle is beyond threshold.  Vehicle is at too high of an altitude.  Ambient temperature is beyond operating range.  Stop/Start related system malfunction.  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is on and speed is set. It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the Stop/Start system going into a STOP/START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145 STARTING AND OPERATING TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN AUTOSTOP TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/ S TART S YSTEM While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is pressed. The transmission will automatically re-engage upon engine restart. SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system, the system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the instrument cluster display  The transmission selector is moved out of DRIVE.  To maintain cabin temperature comfort.  HVAC is set to full defrost mode. manually adjusted.  Battery voltage drops too low. During this time a message will display “Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging”.  Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.  Stop/Start related system malfunction.  Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold. TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S TOP/ S TART S YSTEM After turning off the Stop/Start system, push the Stop/Start OFF switch again (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off. Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Automatically While In Autostop:  HVAC system temperature or fan speed is 145 Stop/Start OFF Button Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode will be disabled Ú page 121. NOTE: The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the ON mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and back ON. If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message appears in the instrument cluster display, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If a malfunction occurs during an autostop, the vehicle may not auto start and will need a key start. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146 146 STARTING AND OPERATING CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED To Activate Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:  Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant preset speed.  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance with the vehicle ahead. NOTE:  In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled, Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature selected.  Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice versa. CRUISE C ONTROL When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. WARNING! Cruise Control Buttons 1 — On/Off 2 — CANC/Cancel 3 — SET (+)/Accel 4 — RES/Resume 5 — SET (-)/Decel Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always turn the system off when you are not using it. To Set A Desired Speed WARNING! Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. Turn the Cruise Control on. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147 STARTING AND OPERATING 147 To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing To Resume Speed To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). U.S. Speed (mph) USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing the set speed from memory. result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h)  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control. WARNING! Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. To Deactivate Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the OFF position erases the set speed from memory. ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control function performs differently Ú page 146. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148 148 STARTING AND OPERATING ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. NOTE:  If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to exceed the original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.  Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica- tions to the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.  Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehi- cles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature selected Ú page 370. WARNING! WARNING!  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve- nience system. It is not a substitute for active driver involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.  The ACC system:  Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.  Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for approximately three minutes in the stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within three minutes the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be canceled. You should switch off the ACC system:  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,  Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).  Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions. (Continued) sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).  When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.  When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.  When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149 STARTING AND OPERATING Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu  System Off The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate the ACC system. The instrument cluster displays the current ACC system settings.The information it displays depends on ACC system status.  ACC Proximity Warning Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until one of the following displays in the instrument cluster display: Adaptive Cruise Control Off When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons 1 — CANC/Cancel 2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off 3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off 4 — Distance Decrease 5 — SET (+)/Accel 6 — RES/Resume 7 — SET (-)/Decel 8 — Distance Increase When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” Push the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the instrument cluster display: Adaptive Cruise Control Set When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.” 149  ACC Unavailable Warning The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity. Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph (32 km/h). When the system is turned on and in the READY state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.” When the system is off, the instrument cluster display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:  When the brakes are applied  When the parking brake is applied  When the gear selector is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.  When the vehicle speed is below the minimum The ACC screen may display once again if any of the following ACC activity occurs:  When the brakes are overheated  System Cancel  Driver Override speed range  When the driver’s door is open at low speeds  When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150 150 STARTING AND OPERATING To Activate/Deactivate Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster will read “ACC Ready.” To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” WARNING! Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. To Set A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The instrument cluster display will show the set speed. NOTE: Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC enabled. To change between the different modes, push the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode. WARNING! In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is selected. If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph (32 km/h). NOTE: Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below 20 mph (32 km/h). If either system is set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle. NOTE:  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster display.  If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed while an ACC is enabled, the system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal. To Cancel The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed Cruise Control systems:  The brake pedal is applied  The CANC (cancel) button is pushed  The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151 STARTING AND OPERATING 151  The vehicle parking brake is applied NOTE: U.S. Speed (mph)  The braking temperature exceeds normal range  If your vehicle is at a standstill longer than two  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will (overheated) The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:  Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds  Driver door is opened at low speeds To Turn Off The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:  The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed  The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed  The ignition is placed in the OFF position To Resume If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last set speed. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being used. seconds, the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) to the existing set speed.  ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. WARNING! The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. Metric Speed (km/h)  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.  If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display. NOTE: When you override and push the SET (+) button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152 152 STARTING AND OPERATING When ACC Is Active  When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle. vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.  The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until: stop when following the vehicle in front. If your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, after two seconds the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.  The ACC system maintains set speed when driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated). Setting The Following Distance In ACC The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.  The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor. Distance Settings  The distance setting is changed. 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars) 2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars) 3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars) 4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)  The system disengages Ú page 150. To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Increase button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system applies the brakes. A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity. To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Decrease button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter). The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary. NOTE: 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously. Overtake Aid When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side. ACC Operation At Stop In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle in front, your vehicle will resume motion, without the need for any driver action, if the vehicle in front starts moving within two seconds. If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set speed. NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a standstill for approximately three consecutive minutes, the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be canceled. While the ACC system is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will be canceled. WARNING! When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. Display Warnings And Maintenance “WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR” WARNING The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning will display and a chime will sound when conditions temporarily limit system performance. 153 This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will show “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the system will deactivate. The “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. NOTE: If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still available. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154 154 STARTING AND OPERATING To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage the sensor lens.  Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.  If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due to a collision, see an authorized dealer for service.  Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reactivating it. NOTE: If the “ACC/AEB Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at an authorized dealer. “CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will show “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance. The “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur. If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality. NOTE: If the “ACC/AEB Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer. SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. Precautions While Driving With ACC In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene. The following are examples of these types of situations: 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155 STARTING AND OPERATING 155 TOWING A TRAILER TURNS AND BENDS LANE CHANGING Towing a trailer is not recommended when using ACC. When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve, the system will resume your original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. OFFSET DRIVING ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. USING ACC ON HILLS ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hill. Lane Changing Example Offset Driving Condition Example ACC Hill Example 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156 156 STARTING AND OPERATING NARROW VEHICLES STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a stationary object as it did not previously detect movement from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary. PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an obstacle. NOTE:  The driver can override the automatic braking function by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity during the braking event, turning ParkSense off via the ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the automatic brakes are being applied. Narrow Vehicle Example Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example  Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not available.  Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking System Module. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157 STARTING AND OPERATING  The automatic braking function may not provide ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.  The automatic braking function may not be ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle speed, road conditions, and brake capability. applied fast enough for moving obstacles that approach the rear of the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.  The automatic braking function can be enabled/disabled from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the Uconnect system.  ParkSense will retain its last known configura- tion state for the automatic braking function through ignition cycles. The automatic braking function is intended to assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE. NOTE:  The system is designed to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.  The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's acceleration and braking and is responsible for the vehicle's movements. For limitations of this system and recommendations, see Ú page 161. PARKSENSE SENSORS The six ParkSense sensors (four when vehicle is not equipped with front sensors), located in the rear fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front and behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The front sensors detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from 157 the front fascia/bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. These distances depend on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal direction. PARKSENSE DISPLAY The warning display will turn on indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or rear regions based on the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158 158 STARTING AND OPERATING ParkSense Arcs 1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159 STARTING AND OPERATING 159 The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR Rear Distance (inches/cm) Greater than 79 inches (200 cm) 79-59 inches (200-150 cm) 59-47 inches (150-120 cm) 47-39 inches (120-100 cm) 39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches (30 cm) Arcs — Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing Arcs — Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing Arcs — Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing Audible Alert Chime None Single 1/2 Second Tone (for rear center only) Slow (for rear center only) Slow (for rear center only) Fast (for rear center only) Fast Continuous Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT Front Distance (inches/cm) Greater than 47 inches (120 cm) 47-39 inches (120-100 cm) 39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm) Less than 12 inches (30 cm) Arcs — Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing Arcs — Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing Arcs — Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160 160 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. Adjustable Chime Volume Settings Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected from the Uconnect system Ú page 188. If the Uconnect system is equipped, chime volume settings will not be accessible from the instrument cluster display. The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles. PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected in the Uconnect system Ú page 188. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display Ú page 113. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. ENABLING A ND D ISABLING P ARKSENSE ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch located below the Uconnect display. When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on. NOTE: When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense system will reject customer input to turn the system off via the switch. The instrument cluster display will show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled" message. SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message for five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show a "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with a "WIPE OFF" or “SERVICE” overlay, depending on the location and fault type. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161 STARTING AND OPERATING ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.  When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE PRECAUTIONS NOTE:  Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.  Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense.  When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key. the radio when it is sounding a tone. care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/ bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the appropriate fascia/bumper.  Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.  ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is in the open position. An opened liftgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. 161  There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the object is moving. This may cause the automatic braking application to be delayed. WARNING!  Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom- mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162 162 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION!  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side). NOTE:  The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and must intervene as required.  The system is designed to assist the driver and not to substitute the driver.  The vehicle must be driven slowly when using  During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED  The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space, providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle touches the steering wheel after being instructed to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver will be required to manually complete the parking maneuver. environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).  New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve the performance of the feature.  The use of wheels and tires that are different size to the original equipment could affect the operation of the system. ENABLING A ND DISABLING T HE PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the switch a second time will disable the system (LED turns off). The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off automatically for any of the following conditions:  Parking maneuver is completed.  Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when searching for a parking space.  Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space.  Steering wheel is touched during active steering guidance into the parking space.  ParkSense switch is pushed.  The driver’s door is opened. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163 STARTING AND OPERATING  The liftgate is opened.  Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking System intervention. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum numbers of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within eight shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only operate and search for a parking space when the following conditions are present:  The gear selector is in DRIVE.  The ignition is in the RUN position.  The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti- vated.  The driver’s door is closed.  The liftgate is closed.  Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).  The outer surface and the underside of the front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction. When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions are not present. 163 NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately 15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch. PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING S PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpendicular When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Perpendicular Park” or “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Parallel Park” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Push the OK button on the left side steering wheel switch to change your parking space setting to parallel or perpendicular. Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Push OK for Parallel Park” message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Parallel Park 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164 164 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE:  When searching for a parking space, use the turn signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if the turn signal is not activated. When an available parking space has been found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence (depending on the type of maneuver being performed).  The driver needs to make sure that the selected parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.). Move Backward Into Parallel Parking Space  The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc., from surrounding objects/vehicles).  When searching for a parking space, the driver should drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.  The feature will only indicate the last detected parking space (example: if passing multiple available parking spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected parking space for the maneuver). Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands from the steering wheel. When the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still removed from the steering wheel), you will be instructed to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position. The system may then instruct the driver to wait for steering to complete before then instructing to check surroundings and move backward. Move Backward Into Perpendicular Parking Space The system may instruct several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE), with hands off of the steering wheel, before instructing the driver to check surroundings and complete the parking maneuver. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165 STARTING AND OPERATING When the vehicle is in the parking position, the maneuver is complete and the driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position, then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position" will be displayed momentarily. NOTE:  It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.  It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.  When the system instructs the driver to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.  The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts, the system will cancel and the instrument cluster display will instruct the driver to complete the maneuver manually.  The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering guidance into the parking space. The system will provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.  If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle. WARNING! Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up and moving forward. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 165 CAUTION!  The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.  The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166 166 STARTING AND OPERATING LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED LANESENSE OPERATION The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). It uses a forward-looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries. When both lane markings are detected and the driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel, as well as a visual warning in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying force to the steering wheel at any time. When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic or a torque warning will not be provided. NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and provide an audible and visual warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel. TURNING LANESENSE ON OR O FF LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display. When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white. The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display. To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is shown in the instrument cluster display. To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense button again (LED turns on). NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167 STARTING AND OPERATING Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected  When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane- Sense Telltale is solid white only when the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the left side.  When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the visual warning in the instrument cluster display will show the left inside lane line flashing yellow (on/off), while the outside lane line on the left of the display will remain solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow. NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected. Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected  When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. 167  When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left inside and outside lane lines turn solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. 4 Lane Drift With Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow Telltale Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/ Flashing Yellow Telltale 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168 168 STARTING AND OPERATING  When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left inside lane line flashes yellow (on/off) while the left outside line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary. For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. CHANGING LANESENSE S TATUS The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. NOTE:  When enabled the system operates above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).  The warnings are disabled with use of the turn signal.  The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision Warning, etc.). PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/ Flashing Yellow Telltale NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate. NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. A touchscreen button to disable display of the camera image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touchscreen button personalization entry in the camera settings menu. When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back up path based on the steering wheel position. Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169 STARTING AND OPERATING The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone: Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION!  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround View Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen image of the surroundings and Top View of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or a different view is selected through the touchscreen soft buttons. The Top View of the vehicle will show which doors are open. The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround View Camera system is comprised of four sequential cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and side mirrors. 169 NOTE: The Surround View Camera system has programmable settings that may be selected through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. Press this button on the touchscreen to enter the Surround View Camera menu in the Uconnect system. When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear View and Top View is the default view of the system. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen button X to disable the display of the camera image. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera delay turned off, the Surround View system is exited and the last known screen appears again. Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170 170 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Modes Of Operation  Top View will show which sliding doors are open.  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph Manual activation of the Surround View system is selected by pressing the Surround View Camera soft key located in the Controls screen within the Uconnect system.  Open front doors will remove outside image. (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button X, the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.  The touchscreen button X to disable display of the camera image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is not in REVERSE. When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, including the side view mirrors and its projected back up path based on the steering wheel position. Top View The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with Rear View and Front View in a split screen display. There is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming object. Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) Rear Cross Path View Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will give the driver a wider angle view of the Rear View. The Top View will be disabled when this is selected. The Front View will show you what is immediately in front of the vehicle and is always paired with the Top View of the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone: Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle This is the default view of the system in REVERSE and is always paired with the Top View of the vehicle with optional active guidelines for the projected path when enabled. Front View Plus Top View Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. Zone Rear View Plus Top View Front Cross Path View Surround View Camera View NOTE:  Front tires will be in image when the tires are turned.  Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the image will appear distorted. Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key will give the driver a wider angle view of the Front View. The Top View will be disabled when this is selected. Back Up Camera View Pressing the Back Up Camera soft key will provide a full screen rear view with Zoom View. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171 STARTING AND OPERATING Zoom View Deactivation When the Rear View is being displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector position, Zoom View is available. By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view to the standard Rear View. The system can be deactivated under the following conditions: When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay will display the standard Rear View. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will automatically resume. Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h). If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h). NOTE:  If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear grey.  While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.  The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).  The vehicle shifted into PARK.  The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE and the X button is pressed.  The camera delay system is turned off manually through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 188. NOTE:  If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.  If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an authorized dealer. WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Surround View Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 171 CAUTION!  To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only be used as a parking aid. The Surround View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using Surround View. FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a FamCam system that consists of an interior monitoring camera mounted on the headliner that allows you to view cargo/passengers in the rear interior of the vehicle through the Uconnect screen. To activate the feature, press the FamCam button under “Controls” in the Vehicle Menu of the Uconnect system Ú page 188. Alternatively, the feature can be accessed through the App Drawer or a shortcut for the feature can be added to the Favorites bar at the top of the screen for quick access. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172 172 STARTING AND OPERATING The display will show the entire vehicle cabin view on the left side of the display, and a zoomed-in view of a selected seat on the right side of the display. If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the X on the screen, the view will close. Otherwise, the FamCam view will remain on the display. NOTE: When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in the zoomed-in view on the right side of the display will be retained. The next time the feature is activated, the same seat will be shown in the zoomed-in view. CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. 1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the ignition OFF. 2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door (3 o'clock position) and release to open. REFUELING THE VEHICLE There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside the pipe seal the system. FamCam Display (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown) To change the seat shown in the zoomed-in view, press a different seat location on the left side of the display. The zoomed-in view will then show the new seat location. By default, the second row driver’s side seat will be displayed in the zoomed-in view. The display will appear in color in well-lit conditions and will appear black and white in low-light conditions. WARNING!  Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.  Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.  A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling. Fuel Filler Door 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe; the nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while refueling. 4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. 5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds after the nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from the nozzle. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173 STARTING AND OPERATING 173 6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Tire Size 7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel filler door and then release. The fuel filler door will latch closed. The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear GAWR. Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel filler door around the perimeter to break the ice buildup. VEHICLE LOADING CERTIFICATION LABEL As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or pillar. This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN. Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR. Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed. Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR. Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174 174 STARTING AND OPERATING Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. WARNING! Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. TRAILER TOWING NOTE: Trailer towing is not permitted for the Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV). In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 173. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175 STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Trailer Sway Control (TSC) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 173. The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. Tongue Weight (TW) The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. Trailer Frontal Area The Frontal Area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. The electronic TSC (if equipped), recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. Weight-Carrying Hitch A Weight-Carrying Hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch A weight-distributing hitch works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing 175 safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. TSC and a weight-distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/ loading to comply with GAWR requirements. WARNING!  An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.  Weight-distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176 176 STARTING AND OPERATING TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg) Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg) Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg) Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177 STARTING AND OPERATING 177 TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. Engine/Transmission 3.6L/Automatic Trailer Tow Package GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg) No 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1500 lb (680 kg) 149 lb (67 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds. NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178 178 STARTING AND OPERATING VEHICLE LOADING CHART Follow these steps to determine the total weight the vehicle can carry: 1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.  Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of vehicle, full fluids, no occupants). 2. Determine occupant count.  For calculation purposes, average weight of an occupant is 150 lb (68 kg). EXAMPLE:  GVWR = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg)  CURB = 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)  Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6,005 lb (2,723 kg) - 4,500 lb (2,041 kg) = 1,505 lb (682 kg) 4 Occupants (at 150 lb [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =  1,505 lb (682 kg) – 600 lb (272 kg) (4 x 150 lb [68 kg]) – 360 lb (163 kg) (10% of 3,600 lb [1,632 kg]) = 545 lb (247 kg) of cargo in vehicle 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179 STARTING AND OPERATING Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants 2 People / 300 lb (136 kg) 4 people / 600 lb (272 kg) 7 people / 1050 lb (476 kg)  Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or rear axles.  GAWR is found on the certification label affixed to the driver’s side door jamb. Max Cargo No Trailer 1205 lb (546 kg) 955 lb (433 kg) 455 lb (206 kg) Max Trailer TW, Max Trailer 1,205 lb (546 kg) – 360 lb (163 kg) = 845 lb (383 kg) 955 lb (433 kg) – 360 lb (163 kg) = 545 lb (247 kg) 455 lb (206 kg) – 360 lb (163 kg) = 95 lb (43 kg) 179 Max Cargo With Max Trailer TW 360 lb (163 kg) 845 lb (383 kg) 4 545 lb (247 kg) 95 lb (43 kg) 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180 180 STARTING AND OPERATING TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:  The tongue weight of the trailer.  The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.  The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Ú page 343. Weight Distribution TOWING REQUIREMENTS To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended. CAUTION!  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.  Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. Perform the maintenance listed in “Scheduled Servicing” Ú page 309. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING!  Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.  When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.  Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. (Continued)  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.  GCWR must not be exceeded.  Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:  GVWR  GTW  GAWR  Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. 181 Towing Requirements — Tires  Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.  Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing while using a full size spare tire.  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.  Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer.  Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.  For further information Ú page 346. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182 182 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes  Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.  An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.  Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg). WARNING!  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident.  Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. CAUTION! If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. NOTE:  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183 STARTING AND OPERATING 183 TOWING TIPS Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic. Automatic Transmission Four-Pin Connector 1 — Ground 2 — Park 3 — Left Stop/Turn 4 — Right Stop/Turn Seven-Pin Connector 1 — Backup Lamps 2 — Running Lamps 3 — Left Stop/Turn 4 — Ground 5 — Battery 6 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Electric Brakes Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. For increased engine braking on steep downhill grades, select the LOW range. Cruise Control — If Equipped  Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.  Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184 184 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD Models AWD Models Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Front OK NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED ALL OK OK Dolly Tow On Trailer NOTE:  To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB) engagement, you must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the ground). The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features Ú page 188.  When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.  If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial towing service, for further information Ú page 306. DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. CAUTION!  DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.  Ensure that the EPB is released, and remains released, while being towed.  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185 STARTING AND OPERATING Recreational Towing All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground. Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. 3. Apply the parking brake. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 4. Place the transmission in PARK. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. DRIVING TIPS DRIVING ON S LIPPERY SURFACES 7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not start the vehicle. Information in this section will aid in safe controlled launches in adverse conditions. 8. Press and hold the brake pedal. Acceleration 9. Release the parking brake. 10. Turn the ignition OFF. 11. Release the brake pedal. Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels. 185 WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build-up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:  Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy.  Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.  Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible.  Keep tires properly inflated.  Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. 4 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186 186 STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVING THROUGH WATER WARNING! Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Warnings and Cautions before doing so. CAUTION!  Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.  Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. CAUTION!  Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. (Continued) damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.  Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can  Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.  Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water.  Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving WARNING!  Driving through standing water may cause through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. (Continued) cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187 187 MULTIMEDIA UCONNECT SYSTEMS For detailed information about your Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display or Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle. CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly. Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed. WARNING!  ONLY insert trusted devices/components into your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.  As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately. NOTE:  To help further improve user experience, features, stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates.  Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188 188 MULTIMEDIA UCONNECT SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow you to access and change the Customer Programmable Features. Many features can vary by vehicle. Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and change settings. Push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting. Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and MUTE buttons on the faceplate. CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the screen to turn the screen on. Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system. Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset the radio. Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189 MULTIMEDIA 189 For the Uconnect 5 With 7-inch Display and the Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display KeySense The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique four-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first time. This four-digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer. After pressing the KeySense button on the touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will be available: NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle. Forward Collision Warning This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected. ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected. Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190 190 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Description Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”. Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off. Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime. Maximum Vehicle Speed This setting adjusts the Maximum Vehicle Speed. This feature can be set to 65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105 or 110 km/h) by using the “-” and “+” options. Start Up Fuel Level Message This setting will turn the Start Up Fuel Level Message on or off. Earlier Low Fuel Alert This setting will turn the Earlier Low Fuel Alert on or off. My Profile When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano. Display Mode The setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”. “Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name 191 Description Display Brightness Headlights On This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness. Display Brightness Headlights Off This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness. Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio. Units This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L) units of measurement independently. Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off. Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off. Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display. Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. System Text Size This setting will allow you to change the text on the radio to “Standard”, “Large”, and “Taller”. Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192 192 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Description Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”. Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off. Voice Barge-in This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off. Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off. Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”. Radio Off With Door This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The available settings are “On” and “Off”. App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options. App Drawer Unfavoritings Popups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options. New Text Message Popups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. This setting options are “On” and “Off”. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name 193 Description Missed Calls Message This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. This setting options are “On” and “Off”. Navigation Popups This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. This setting options are “On” and “Off”. Navigation Settings This setting will allow you to customize the settings within Navigation Mode. Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started. Audio Settings This setting will take you to the audio settings for the vehicle profiles. Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout. Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default. More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194 194 MULTIMEDIA Display After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Language This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano. Display Mode This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display. Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness. Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness. Set Theme/Theme Mode This setting will allow you to change the theme of the radio. Units This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L) units of measurement independently. Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off. Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name 195 Description Control Screen Timeout This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five seconds or stay open until manually closed. Navigation Next Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display. Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. Ready To Drive Pop-Ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-Ups in the Instrument Cluster Display. Safety & Driving Assistance After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle. Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196 196 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Description Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system “Off” or “Warning + Active Braking”. LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense Submenu This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”. LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense Submenu This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”. ParkSense This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected. Front ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”. Rear ParkSense Volume This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”. Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off. Sliding Door Alert This setting will turn the Sliding Door Alert on and off. Blind Spot Alert This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights + Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime. Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off. KeySense This setting will access KeySense features. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197 MULTIMEDIA 197 Clock & Date After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Sync Time With GPS This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the time via the GPS location. Set Time This setting will allow you to manually set the time of your clock. Time Format This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format. Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date by day, month, and year (DD/MM/YY). Set Time Hours This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours. Set Time Minutes This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes. Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198 198 MULTIMEDIA Phone/Bluetooth® When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen. Do Not Disturb This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message). Do Not Disturb All This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb All” settings menu. The available options are “On” and “Off”. Enable Two Active Phones This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The setting options are “On” and “Off”. Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199 MULTIMEDIA 199 Voice — If Equipped After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”. Wake Up Word This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition “Wake Up” word on or off. Voice Barge-In This setting will allow you to turn the voice recognition barge-in feature on or off. Show Command List This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200 200 MULTIMEDIA Navigation — If Equipped When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types. For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Camera When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of REVERSE. Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off. ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of REVERSE. ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off. ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201 MULTIMEDIA 201 Mirrors & Wipers When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”. Auto Folding Side Mirrors This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed. The available options are “On” and “Off”. Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off. Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202 202 MULTIMEDIA Lights When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights. NOTE:  When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchased.  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”. Headlight Illumination On Approach This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”. Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated. Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off. Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off. Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off. Flash Lights With Sliding Door This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door reverses. The available options are “On” and “Off”. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203 MULTIMEDIA 203 Brakes After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off. Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing. Doors & Locks 5 After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: NOTE:  The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized dealer for service.  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Auto Door Locks This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h). Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside. Flash Lights With Lock This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob on or off. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204 204 MULTIMEDIA Setting Name Description Sound Horn With Lock This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice. Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob. Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button. Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘N Go™) on or off. Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to the key fob. Power Liftgate Alert This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”. Sliding Door Alert This setting will chime an audible alert when the sliding door reverses or sense an obstacle. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”. Flash Lights with Sliding Door This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door is opening. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”. Hands Free Power Liftgate This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open the power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”. Hands Free Power Sliding Door This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open the power sliding doors. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205 MULTIMEDIA 205 Seats & Comfort When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. Start The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started. Easy Exit Seats This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”. 3rd Row Seat Recline Lockout This setting will activate the 3rd row seat recline lockout. Selectable options are “Off”, “Lock On Ignition”, and “Always Locked”. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206 206 MULTIMEDIA Key Off Options When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier. Key Off Power Delay This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”. Headlight Off Delay This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time. Radio Off With Door This setting will turn the radio off when the driver or passenger door is opened. The available settings are “On” and “Off”. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207 MULTIMEDIA 207 Audio When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Balance/Fade This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location. Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio. Speed Adjusted Volume This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off. AUX Volume Offset This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”. Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device. Auto On Radio This setting will automatically turn on when the vehicle is in ON/RUN or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition OFF. The selectable options are “On”, “Off”, and “Recall Last”. Volume Adjustment This setting allows you to adjust the volume levels for features such as Media, Phone, Navigation, and Voice Recognition. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208 208 MULTIMEDIA Notifications When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting turns the “App Favorited” pop-up on or off. App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting turns the “App Unfavorited” pop-up on or off. New Text Message Popups This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any connected phone on or off. Missed Calls Message This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected phone on or off. Navigation Popups This setting turns navigation pop-ups on or off. SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts The setting turns receiving notifications for SiriusXM® Travel Link Weather Alerts on or off. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209 MULTIMEDIA 209 SiriusXM® Setup When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning. NOTE:  A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description SiriusXM® Account, Profiles & Settings This setting will allow you to view your SiriusXM® account information, profiles linked to the system, and the various settings you have saved and stored to those profiles. Block Explicit This setting will allow you to block explicit content by turning it on or off. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210 210 MULTIMEDIA Accessibility — If Equipped When pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the system will display options related to the vehicle’s theater system. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Accessibility The Accessibility feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray™ and USB Video functions, when it is activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce “Play button selected”, and then once pressed again the Play button will perform its action. Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211 MULTIMEDIA 211 Software Updates When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display information on updating the Uconnect system’s software. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the setting are “On” and “Off”. Software Downloads over Wi-Fi System Information When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Version Information When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying information about the version of your radio. License Information When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the licensing information of your radio. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212 212 MULTIMEDIA Reset When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus. NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary. Setting Name Description Notifications Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system. Restart Radio This setting will restart the radio. Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout. Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default. Clear Personal Data This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets. Reset Wi-Fi Password for Projection This setting will reset your Wi-Fi password for projection. Factory Reset This setting will factory reset the radio. It may cause the radio to restart multiple times and the backup camera, radio, SOS, and several driving assistance features will not be available. Once the system resets, you will need to turn the vehicle off then back on to complete the process. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213 MULTIMEDIA REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON FIRE TV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED OVERVIEW Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is designed to give your family years of enjoyment. Fire TV lets passengers enjoy a wide variety of content from popular apps (subscriptions may be required). Stream videos, play games, listen to music, get information, and watch downloaded programs all while on the road. In addition to streaming and downloaded content, changing the input in Fire TV also allows users to: NOTE: Vehicle must be in an active and usable cellular range and properly equipped with a Uconnect 5 NAV system and Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV package. Streaming requires a Wi-Fi connection and registered Amazon account to run Fire TV in the vehicle. Streaming service subscriptions are not included. Certain services are subject to change or withdrawal at any time, may not be available in all areas and languages, and may require separate subscriptions. GETTING S TARTED built-in Touchscreens ACCESSING REAR SEAT E NTERTAINMENT WITH F IRE TV BUILT- IN FROM THE FRONT RADIO SCREEN Option 2  Plug and play a variety of standard video games or devices into the HDMI port Video USB port  Individual Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV 2. Press the Rear Seat button icon. customer/display  Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio Alexa  Front radio screen 1. Press the Media button. via Miracast capable devices (see support here): https://www.amazon.com/gp/help/  Plug and play a variety of devices into the  Rear Seat Entertainment Voice Remote with Option 1  Mirror what’s on your phone or tablet to Fire TV (not included, customer will have to provide their own) There are three different ways to operate the features of Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in: You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in system by following these steps:  Play your favorite CDs, DVDs, or Blu-ray™ Discs  Listen to audio over wireless headphones 213 Rear Seat Entertainment for Uconnect 5/5 NAV 1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen) 2 — Headphone Jack 3 — HDMI Port 4 — USB C Charging Port 5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen) 1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the touchscreen. 2. Press the Uconnect Theater button on the touchscreen. You may need to navigate to different pages in the Apps drawer to find the Uconnect Theater button. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214 214 MULTIMEDIA ACCESSING REAR SEAT E NTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV BUILT- IN FROM THE REAR SCREENS You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in system from the rear screens by just flipping the screens open. Flipping open the rear screens will automatically turn the system on. Pushing the Power button on the Rear Seat Entertainment Voice Remote with Alexa. NOTE: While accessing on the rear screens, the system will launch with the integrated Fire TV. FIRST TIME S TARTING UP (U SING THE REAR SCREENS) Boot-Up Screen When turning on the system for the first time from the rear screens, a boot-up screen will appear on the system displaying the Fire TV logo. During this boot up sequence, language options will be available for the system. Voice Remote with Alexa Pairing After the boot-up sequence is complete, the system will then give the option to pair a Voice Remote with Alexa (two are included with the system). Follow the on-screen instructions to pair the Voice Remote with Alexa to the system. NOTE: If the Voice Remote with Alexa pairing fails, on-screen instructions will appear for trying to pair again. Connecting to a Network During the start-up process, the system will need to be connected to a network. Multiple network sources can be options for the system, and one will need to be selected for the system to function. Some options for a network connection are:  Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if activated, it will show as a possible network for the system on the screen).  Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network.  In-vehicle Wi-Fi. NOTE: When a network is connected to the system for the first time, an over-the-air software update will take place using the Wi-Fi connection. After this first-time update, updates will only accrue when one is available. It is recommended that you connect your RSE/Amazon Fire OS to a Wi-Fi Hotspot with unlimited data and a good signal (such as a home Wi-Fi network) in order to check for future Fire OS updates. Account Sign-in The next step will be the option to sign in to your Amazon account. There are two options to sign into the system:  I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with an already existing Amazon account  I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon Account If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the on-screen steps to set up an Amazon account with the system. Parental Controls Another feature that will appear during this first time set up is parental controls. When the parental controls page appears, it will give the options to “Enable Parental Controls” and “No Parental Controls”. If “Enable Parental Controls” is selected, follow the on-screen steps to set up parental controls for the system. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV B UILT- IN A LEXA A feature with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in that enhances your experience is Alexa. It is simple to get started using this feature. Push the Voice button at the top of the Voice Remote with Alexa to activate Alexa and get started. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215 MULTIMEDIA LISTEN VIA VEHICLE S PEAKERS A feature within Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is the front radio Listen feature. On the front radio Home screen for Fire TV, select the Listen button in the top right corner on either card for Screen 1 or 2. This will allow you to have either rear screen play audio through all the speakers in the vehicle. QUICK MENU Accessing the Quick Menu will give you more options for Fire TV. To access the Quick Menu, tap the screen, and it will appear. The Quick Menu is also accessible by pushing the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with Alexa.  Gear/Settings — This will let you access certain settings in the system. For more setting options, select “Settings” within the on-screen Gear/Settings menu.  Vehicle — This will bring up the Vehicle menu. From here you can adjust rear climate controls and the Are We There Yet? app. 1. Install batteries into the remote. If parental controls were not set during the first time start up of the system, they can be set by following these steps: 4. In Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth® Devices”. 1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with Alexa or tap the screen to access “Settings” in the Quick Menu. 2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen. 3. Select “Settings” on the screen.  On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the 4. While in Settings, select “Preferences”.  Home — This will take you to the Home screen. If the Voice Remote with Alexa needs to be paired again or a new remote is being paired, follow these procedures: 2. Tap the screen and select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen.  Power — This will power the screen off.  Back — This will let you go back a page. PAIRING THE VOICE R EMOTE WITH A LEXA (U SING THE R EAR SCREENS) PARENTAL C ONTROLS (USING THE R EAR S CREENS) Some options of the Quick Menu are: on-screen remote to use with the system. 215 5. Select “Parental Controls”. From here you can turn Parental Controls on or off and set up a PIN for the controls using the Voice Remote with Alexa. 3. Select “Settings” on the screen. 5. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”. 6. Follow the on-screen steps for Voice Remote with Alexa pairing. A long press on the Home button can also re-pair a Voice Remote with Alexa that has become disconnected. NOTE: Your vehicle is included with two Voice Remotes with Alexa. Each Voice Remote with Alexa can be paired with each rear screen. Pairing one with either rear screen will pair that Voice Remote with Alexa with that screen. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216 216 MULTIMEDIA MEDIA S OURCES INPUT (U SING THE FRONT RADIO AND REAR SCREENS) REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV B UILT- IN V OICE REMOTE WITH A LEXA Front Radio Screen Inputs available within Launch Source under “Inputs” are “Fire TV”, “HDMI”, “Blu-ray™”, “DVD’, and “USB”. 1. Power Button — Turns the screen for the selected channel on or off. 2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has options by pressing the Circle button Up, Down, Left, or Right to navigate on-screen for selections and pushing the center button to confirm selections. 3. Back — Push to exit out of menus or return to the previous screen. Rear Screens To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on the Fire TV Home screen and select your desired input under “Inputs”. 4. Home — Push to return to the Fire TV Home screen. Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in the top menu. While in this tab, scroll down to “Inputs” for selection. 5. Seek Backward/Rewind Button — Push and hold to fast rewind through the current audio track or video chapter. Push once to revert back to the previous track. NOTE: The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend on the naming of the vehicle’s brand. 6. Volume — Push the - button to decrease the volume and + button to increase the volume. 7. Channel Guide — Push to access the channel guide for the system. 8. Mute — Mutes headphone audio. Voice Remote with Alexa 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217 MULTIMEDIA 9. Prime Video — Push to launch the Prime Video app. 10. Partner 1 — Push to launch to Partner 1 app. Replacing The Voice Remote with Alexa Batteries 11. Voice Button — Push to activate Alexa. Each Voice Remote with Alexa requires two AAA batteries for operation. 12. Menu — Push to access the Fire TV menu. To replace the batteries: 13. Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to fast forward through the current audio track or video chapter. Push once to skip to the next track. 1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the Voice Remote with Alexa, then slide the battery cover downward. 14. Play/Pause Button pause disc play. ‖ — Begin/resume or 15. Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow button on the Channel button to browse channels available in Fire TV. 16. Recent — Push to access recently viewed content on Fire TV. 2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery recycling procedures for your area. 3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them according to the polarity diagram shown inside the battery compartment. 4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on. 17. Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting options for Fire TV. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH FIRE TV B UILT- IN S TREAMING (USING THE F RONT RADIO AND REAR SCREENS) 18. Partner 2 — Push to launch to Partner 2 app. Access Using Launch Source 19. Vehicle — Push to activate the Vehicle menu. To access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in from the front radio, press the Media tab located on the bottom menu bar. Then select the Rear Seat option located on the top menu bar. Then select “Launch Source”, and then under “Inputs” select “Fire TV Home”. 217 Access Using Browse Media Selecting “Browse Media” on the front radio screen will give access to different media within Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in. These options will be in the top menu of “Browse Media”:  Fire TV — Selecting Fire TV will give options to view streaming options for categories and to select apps. These options will be selectable on the left slider menu in “Browse Media”. While in “Browse Media” under Fire TV, it will display recent activity under “Recent”. This will display recent videos viewed from Fire TV and recent downloads as well.  USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will appear that are options with a USB device connected to Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in.  USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will appear that are options with a USB device connected to Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218 218 MULTIMEDIA Access Using the Voice Remote with Alexa and Rear Screens The top menu bar for Fire TV will have the options for “Home”, “Library”, “Brand”, “Live”, and “Apps”. Rear passengers will be able to access Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in streaming by pressing the “Prime Video”, “Partner 1”, or “Partner 2” button on the Voice Remote with Alexa. Selecting one of those buttons on the Voice Remote with Alexa will take you to the home page for that respective streaming service. Turning on either of the rear screens will launch Fire TV. By default, the rear screens will always launch in Fire TV. Below the top menu bar will be streaming options linked to your Prime account like “Prime Video”. Fire TV Fire TV is your source for online streaming with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in. NOTE: 4G Wi-Fi Hot Spot needs to be activated on the vehicle for streaming to be accessible. This can be set up when Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in is turned on for the first time from the rear screens. A mobile device can also be used as the Wi-Fi Hot Spot for the vehicle. A data source needs to be either an in-vehicle Wi-Fi plan or through a 4G or 5G device. To access Fire TV on the front screen, select “Launch Source”, then “Fire TV Home” under the Inputs selection. The front radio screen offers some options:  Power — This will turn Fire TV on or off.  Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles between the Rear Screens (for use with front radio screen only).  Collapse — While viewing on the front radio screen, this will collapse the screen to dashboard view.  Source Drawer — This will open the “Source Drawer” and the source logo will be displayed on the icon.  Browse Media — This will open the “Browse Media” pop-up.  Back — This will let you go back the previous page.  Fire TV Home — This will take you back to the Fire TV home page.  Menu — This will open the Fire TV menu.  Remote icon — This will display the on-screen remote. NOTE: Front screen viewing and watching can only be done when the vehicle is in PARK. The rear screens will always launch with Fire TV. PLAY A BLU- RAY™ I F E QUIPPED OR DVD — Playing a Blu-ray™ or DVD from the Front Radio Screen 1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc or DVD disc into the disc player with the label facing up. NOTE: The DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player is located under the radio controls in the instrument panel. 2. Press the Media button on the bottom menu bar. Then press the Rear Entertainment tab on the top menu bar. Then select “Launch Source” on the radio touchscreen. 3. Select the Blu-ray™ or DVD under inputs in the Launch Source menu 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219 MULTIMEDIA 4. To play a Blu-ray™ or DVD disc on both screens simultaneously, select “Launch Source” and then under Inputs, select “View Screen 1 or 2”. FIRE TV APPS/G AMES (U SING THE REAR SCREENS) Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in. 219 PLAY VIDEO G AMES Connect the video game console to either of the HDMI ports located behind the first row seat. NOTE: No preloaded games are included with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in. To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the system and select “Apps” in the top menu. Within the Apps menu you can purchase apps and games. From here you can also select all the apps and games that have been purchased. DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Player 1 — DVD/Blu-ray™ Player 2 — Rear Seat Entertainment With Amazon Fire Built-In USB Ports NOTE: To view video content on the radio screen, bring the vehicle to a stop. Playing a Blu-ray™ or DVD from the Rear Screens 1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc or DVD disc into the disc player with the label facing up. 2. Scroll down on the Fire TV Home screen and select Blu-ray™ or DVD input under “Input”. 5 USING T HE VIDEO USB PORT Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and play your favorite music or movies. NOTE: To view USB media on the rear screens, insert a USB drive into the port next to the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc player. The USB drive port is located under the radio controls in the instrument panel. On the rear screen you can browse the content of the USB device by going to the USB source in the inputs. Use the search feature to find your media faster. AUX/HDMI/USB 1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only) 2 — HDMI Port 3 — USB Port (Charge Only) NOTE: Certain high-end video games may exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter Ú page 91. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220 220 MULTIMEDIA HEADPHONES OPERATION Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in does not come equipped with headphones. Customers will need to provide their own wireless headphones that can be paired with the system using Bluetooth®. Customers can also use their own wired headphones and plug them into a Headphone Jack located under one of the rear screens. Wireless Headphones Pairing To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in using the rear screens, follow these steps: 1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with Alexa or tap the screen. 2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen. 3. Select “Settings” on the screen. 4. While in Settings, select “Controllers & Bluetooth® Devices”. 5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow the on-screen steps for pairing. While multiple headphones can be paired, only one will output audio at a time. REAR CLIMATE C ONTROLS The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV built-in Ú page 72. Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the Vehicle menu. Tap on either rear screen and select the Vehicle icon or press the Vehicle button on the Voice Remote with Alexa. Then select the Rear Climate Controls option. Options within Rear Climate Controls include: Icon Description ON Climate Control ON Button Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls on. OFF Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off. SYNC SYNC Button Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls. AUTO Button Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between Manual mode and Automatic mode. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221 MULTIMEDIA Icon 221 Description Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the temperature. The temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow. Headliner Mode Bi-Level Mode Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow. Bi-Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets. NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode 1,2,3, etc. Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation. 5 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222 222 MULTIMEDIA LEGAL & COMPLIANCE RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES To access Legal and Compliance information about Rear Seat Entertainment with Fire TV Built-in from the rear screens, follow these steps: Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using the Uconnect system. 1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the Voice Remote with Alexa or tap the screen. 2. Select the Gear/Settings icon on the screen. 3. Select “Settings” on the screen. 4. While in the Settings menu, select “My Fire TV” and then “Legal & Compliance”. REGULATORY AND SAFETY I NFORMATION US/CANADA Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the human body. The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio Ú page 370. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223 223 SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES You also may experience the following normal characteristics when the ABS activates: ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS)  ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information.  Brake pedal pulsations The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle control during braking. The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. The ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). continue to hear for a short time after the stop)  A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop The ABS is designed to function with the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance. WARNING!  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. (Continued) WARNING!  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.  The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224 224 SAFETY Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on. If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. Brake System Warning Light The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225 SAFETY 225 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives that the feature is active, is the torque applied to the steering wheel. ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking objects or other vehicles. ESC enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the above conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver realize the correct course of action through small torques on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of the DST feature is highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very important to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for steering the vehicle. Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) The EBD function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the front axle. WARNING! Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226 226 SAFETY The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. WARNING!  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. (Continued) WARNING!  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. ESC Operating Modes Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes. ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. Partial Off This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off. NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to allow more wheel spin. This can be accomplished by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227 SAFETY WARNING!  When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function- ality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section) has been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced mode.  Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ RUN mode. It should go out with the engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. NOTE:  The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously.  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. 227 Hill Start Assist (HSA) HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:  The feature must be enabled.  The vehicle must be stopped.  The parking brake must be off.  The driver door must be closed.  The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.  The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear).  HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228 228 SAFETY WARNING! WARNING! There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.  If you use a trailer brake controller with your Disabling And Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: Ú page 188. Towing With HSA HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer. trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain to place the transmission in PARK.  Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. Rain Brake Support (RBS) RBS may improve braking performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there is no notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required. Ready Alert Braking (RAB) RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system will prepare the brake system for a panic stop. Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) RSRA will consider the presence of an object in the rear seat when a rear entry/exit door is opened at the beginning of each key cycle. To activate, the rear door must be open for more than one second and the vehicle must be placed in the ON/RUN position within 10 minutes. When the potential presence of an object is determined and/or otherwise inferred, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display reminding driver to check the rear seat(s) immediately after key off accompanied by an alert upon exiting the vehicle. Traction Control System (TCS) The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229 SAFETY If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Ú page 174. When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. WARNING! If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F E QUIPPED The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. 229 The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.7 m). The zone length starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. NOTE:  The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.  The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT Rear Detection Zones When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in PARK (P). change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in false detections. The BSM Warning Light may even remain illuminated the entire time the vehicle is in a forward gear. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230 230 SAFETY  The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the side mirror warning indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a couple of seconds). The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.). If the system detects degraded performance due to contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in side view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will remain illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear the fascia/bumper area around the sensors of the blockage. After removing the blockage, cycle the ignition from on to off and then back on again to reset the system. The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert during these types of zone entries. Entering From The Side Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either side of the vehicle. If the blockage message is still present after cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage. The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume Ú page 232. Side Monitoring Sensor Location Warning Light Location 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231 SAFETY 231 The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 370. Entering From The Rear Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Overtaking/Approaching Opposing Traffic Rear Monitoring WARNING! Overtaking Traffic If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate. Overtaking/Passing The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not require service. The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232 232 SAFETY Rear Cross Path (RCP) RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the driver. Additionally, if your vehicle is obscured by a flat object on one side the system can false alert on vehicles approaching from the opposite direction. When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), the driver is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume. WARNING! RCP Detection Zones RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations. Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when backing up, even when using RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Blind Spot Modes Three selectable modes of operation are available in the Uconnect system. Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is muted. Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted. NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM system, the radio is also muted. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233 SAFETY When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/ hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always requests the chime. Blind Spot Alert Off When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems. NOTE:  The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used.  The BSM system can work in conjunction with the KeySense function of the vehicle (if equipped) Ú page 115. FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH MITIGATION — I F EQUIPPED FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision. 233 NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required. If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes. If a pedestrian is encountered in the path at the same speed threshold, the system will attempt to bring the vehicle to a stop. FCW Message When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated Ú page 370. NOTE:  The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph (2 km/h).  The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the course prediction. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234 234 SAFETY  It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until the next key cycle.  The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. WARNING! Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. Turning FCW On Or Off The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the Uconnect settings. NOTE: The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you. Changing the FCW status to “off” deactivates the system, so no warning or active braking will be available in case of a possible collision. NOTE:  The FCW system state is kept in memory from one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.  FCW can work in conjunction with the KeySense function of the vehicle (if equipped) Ú page 115. FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are programmable through the Uconnect system Ú page 188. The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting and the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking. By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system provides possible collision warnings on objects farther away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the most reaction time to avoid possible collisions. NOTE: The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW possible collision warnings experienced. By changing the FCW status setting to “Near”, the system provides possible collision warnings on objects closer to the vehicle. This results in later warnings and provides less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium" settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience. NOTE: The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW possible collision warnings experienced. NOTE:  Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision, but maintains the audible and visual warnings.  Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.  The system will retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down.  FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher rates of speed.  FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable screens. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235 SAFETY FCW Limited Warning If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”, “FCW Limited Functionality”, “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”, or “FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer. Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — If Equipped The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5 km/h). PEB is a subsystem of the FCW system which provides the driver with audible and visual warnings in the instrument cluster display, and may apply automatic braking when it detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian. WARNING! Turning PEB On Or Off If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:  FCW Unavailable Service Required This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every type of potential collision with a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death. NOTE: Service FCW Warning  ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required 235 PEB Message If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h), the system may provide braking to mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian. If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes. When the system determines a collision with the pedestrian in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated. The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the system to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the pedestrian. The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the Controls settings Ú page 188. To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian Emergency Braking OFF button. To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning Active Braking button. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236 236 SAFETY Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the system, so no warning or active braking will be available in case of a possible frontal collision with the pedestrian. NOTE: The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting selected by the driver after ignition shut down. The system will reset to the default setting when the vehicle is restarted. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. NOTE: The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a TPMS message. When this occurs you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. See Ú page 346 for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value Ú page 370. NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237 SAFETY CAUTION!  The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a poor overall system performance or sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature operation.  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor. NOTE: 237 NOTE:  The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components:  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire  Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors  The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.  Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.  Receiver module  Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the instrument cluster  Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light SERVICE TPMS WARNING When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238 238 SAFETY If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:  Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors  Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals  Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings  Using tire chains on the vehicle  Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped 1. The compact spare tire does not have a Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a different color pressure value. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. 4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW PRESSURE WARNINGS The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239 SAFETY Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to their original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure values. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed as long as no system fault exists. OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS FEATURES  Seat Belt Systems  Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags  Child Restraints 239 Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating position Ú page 262. 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Ú page 262. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240 240 SAFETY 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. 5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured. 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, see Ú page 367 for customer service contact information. WARNING!  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. (Continued) WARNING!  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. SEAT BELT S YSTEMS Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241 SAFETY BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts. Change of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. 241 WARNING!  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.  In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. (Continued) 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242 242 SAFETY WARNING!  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.  Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. WARNING! WARNING!  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.  A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop- erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.  A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. (Continued)  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for inspection. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243 SAFETY Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. 243 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. Positioning The Lap Belt 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244 244 SAFETY Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position. WARNING!  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. Adjustable Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions The second row center (if equipped) and third row center seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the headliner for added convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied. 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from its stowed position in the headliner slightly behind the second or third row seat.  Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.  Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.  Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the vehicle is stationary. Mini-Latch Stowage 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245 SAFETY 2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat. 245 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.” Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled Mini-Latch Plate 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left head restraint. Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. 1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate 2 — Seat Belt Buckle 6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate 1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate Latch Plate And Buckle Connected 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246 246 SAFETY Seat Belt Extender 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt. 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position. Insert Regular Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle Slot To Detach WARNING!  If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.  When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle. If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. WARNING!  ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.  Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247 SAFETY Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. 247 Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position Ú page 272. 6 Energy Management Feature The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. 7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248 248 SAFETY 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. WARNING!  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in 8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. (Continued) WARNING!  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249 SAFETY 249 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat normally. When the car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seat belt securely. Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used to hold the seat belt out of the path of the power folding third row seat. Only place the seat belt webbing in this clip while folding and opening the seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the clip when using the belt to restrain an occupant. WARNING!  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.  Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. 6  Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. Third Row Stow Clip Seat Belt Park Stitch Location WARNING! Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the third row stow clip when using the seat belt to restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be positioned properly on the occupant and they could be more seriously injured in an accident as a result. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250 250 SAFETY SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS (SRS) Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components: Air Bag System Components  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  Air Bag Warning Light  Steering Wheel and Column  Instrument Panel  Knee Impact Bolsters  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags  Seat Belt Buckle Switch  Supplemental Side Air Bags  Supplemental Knee Air Bags  Front and Side Impact Sensors  Seat Belt Pretensioners  Seat Track Position Sensors  Occupant Classification System Air Bag Warning Light The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup. The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- tently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251 SAFETY Redundant Air Bag Warning Light If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Ú page 121. Front Air Bags This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers. 251 WARNING!  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags 2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag 3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/ Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag WARNING!  Being too close to the steering wheel or instru- ment panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. (Continued) front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252 252 SAFETY This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger Occupant Classification System (OCS) that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as determined by the OCS. WARNING!  No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.  Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. (Continued) WARNING!  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Front Air Bag Operation Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front Passenger Seat The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of a Federally regulated safety system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253 SAFETY 253 The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the following:  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor located in the front passenger seat  Air Bag Warning Light Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:  The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or  The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or 6  The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or  The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time. Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Rear-facing child restraint Front Passenger Air Bag Output Reduced-power deployment Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment * It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254 254 SAFETY WARNING!  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:  Sitting upright  Facing forward  Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor  Sitting with their back against the seatback and the seatback in an upright position  Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The OCS communicates the classification status to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted. Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front passenger seating include: Seated Properly Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.  The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrument panel).  The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.  The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright position. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255 SAFETY 255  The front passenger carries or holds an object while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).  Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.  Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console.  Accessories that may change the seated weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.  Anything that may decrease or increase the front passenger’s seated weight. Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly WARNING! The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input, for example:  If a child restraint system, child, small teen- ager or adult in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Not Seated Properly  Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on or near the floor. (Continued) Not Seated Properly 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256 256 SAFETY WARNING!  Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back- packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat. Holding an object may provide an output signal to the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision.  Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working properly, which may result in serious injury or death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for service immediately. The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS components must function as designed. Do not make any modifications to the front passenger seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may be used. The following requirements must be strictly followed:  Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way.  Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.  Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.  Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.  At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by FCA US LLC. WARNING!  Unapproved modifications or service proce- dures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This could result in death or serious injury to the front passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).  If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer. Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags. WARNING!  Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.  Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257 SAFETY Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags. Supplemental Side Air Bags Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats. The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. 257 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. 6 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258 258 SAFETY The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events. WARNING!  Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.  In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. Side Impacts The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. WARNING!  Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.  Seat belts (and child restraints where appro- priate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259 SAFETY WARNING!  Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.  Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Rollover Events Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed. 259 The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.  Seat Belt Buckle Switch The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events. If A Deployment Occurs Air Bag System Components Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  Air Bag Warning Light  Steering Wheel and Column  Instrument Panel  Knee Impact Bolsters  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags  Supplemental Side Air Bags  Supplemental Knee Air Bags  Front and Side Impact Sensors  Seat Belt Pretensioners  Seat Track Position Sensors  Occupant Classification System The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. NOTE:  The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260 260 SAFETY  As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. NOTE:  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.  After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately. Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System:  Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door  Cut off battery power to the: Enhanced Accident Response System  Engine In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:  Electric Motor (if equipped)  Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).  Horn  Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if  Front wiper equipped).  Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.  Unlock the power door locks.  Electric power steering  Brake booster  Electric park brake  Automatic transmission gear selector  Headlamp washer pump (if equipped) 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261 SAFETY NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer. Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have the Enhanced Accident Response System reset. Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING!  Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued) 261 WARNING!  Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262 262 SAFETY The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:  How various systems in your vehicle were operating;  Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,  How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. CHILD R ESTRAINTS Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. NOTE:  For additional information, refer to http:// www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236  Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/ child-car-seat-safety.html 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263 SAFETY 263 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle child restraint Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the outgrown the height or weight limit of their vehicle rear-facing child restraint Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Infant And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. WARNING!  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264 264 SAFETY WARNING! Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may be more severely injured as a result. Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING!  Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.  After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.  When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265 SAFETY Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between the neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach? 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? 265 If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266 266 SAFETY Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System LATCH Label Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below LATCH – Lower Anchors Only Seat Belt Only X X LATCH – Lower Anchors + Top Tether Anchor Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchor X X X X Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267 SAFETY 267 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 7 Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 8 Passenger LATCH Positions Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268 268 SAFETY Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Yes The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable Ú page 52. What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint? Can the rear head restraints be removed? NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269 SAFETY WARNING! Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. 269 Locating The LATCH Anchorages If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown) 8 Passenger Seating 6 Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded 1 — Folded Headrest 2 — Child Restraint LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown) 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorages Shown) 7 Passenger Bench Seating 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270 270 SAFETY Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. There are tether strap anchorages located behind all second row seating positions. The third row has a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the right outboard position and in the center of the 60% seat for either the center or left outboard seating position. All tether anchorages are located on the back of the seat, near the floor. Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row Bench Anchorage Shown) Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown) Tether Strap Anchorages (Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown) LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Tether Strap Anchorages (Second Row 8 Passenger Anchorage Shown) 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271 SAFETY Center Seat LATCH This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are used for the center seating position (2). The left outboard position (3) does not have lower anchorages. Do not install a child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH position in your vehicle. WARNING!  Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-compatible child restraint in the center seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible child restraint using anchorages B and C. This is not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.  Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please see Ú page 271 for typical installation instructions. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Center Seat LATCH Positions If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position. To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See Ú page 272 to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 271 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position. 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See Ú page 276 for directions to attach a tether anchor. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272 272 SAFETY How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. WARNING!  Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. (Continued) WARNING!  Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING!  Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description for additional information on ALR Ú page 247. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273 SAFETY 273 Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274 274 SAFETY Frequently Asked Questions Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle can be removed if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd row center head restraint is removable in all vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints are not removable Ú page 52. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in front of it. WARNING! Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright position when the seat is to be used by an occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered position could result in serious injury or death in a collision. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275 SAFETY WARNING!  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded 1 — Folded Headrest 2 — Child Restraint Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING!  Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. (Continued) 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 275 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See Ú page 276 for directions to attach a tether anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276 276 SAFETY Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of the belt and install the car seat following the steps above. When the car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely. If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features of the child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature. Instead, switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as described in the steps above or move the car seat to a different seating position. If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for additional information. WARNING! Seat Belt Park Stitch Seat Belt Park Stitch Location Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See Ú page 266 for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277 SAFETY 277 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row 8 Passenger 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 6 Top Tether Anchorage Locations 2nd Row Bench Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment (Second Row 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown) 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278 278 SAFETY WARNING!  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. SAFETY TIPS  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. Third Row Tether Attachment The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60% seat in the third row may be used by either the left outboard or the center seating position. Only tether one child restraint to the tether anchorage at a time. WARNING! Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row  Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death.  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo To connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchorage for either seating position on the 60% third row seat: area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. 2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center head restraint and route the tether strap around the inboard (left) side of the head restraint support posts, as shown in the diagram. WARNING! Do not connect the tether strap for more than one child restraint to the tether anchorage on the 60% seat in the third row. This anchorage is intended for one child restraint at a time.  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row and using a seat belt properly. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279 SAFETY TRANSPORTING P ETS Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. CONNECTED VEHICLES Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” Ú page 129. WARNING! It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE I NSIDE THE VEHICLE Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for inspection. Air Bag Warning Light The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN mode. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. 279 It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately Ú page 239. Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280 280 SAFETY WARNING! WARNING! An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:  ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.  ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA US LLC approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle. (Continued) WARNING!  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the passenger’s side floor area.  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. (Continued)  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.  It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281 SAFETY Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately. EXHAUST GAS WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:  Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. (Continued) WARNING!  If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift- gate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.  If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. 281 CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.  Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. 6 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282 282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in the lower center area of the instrument panel. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for other motorists. ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear down your battery. Assist And SOS Mirror Hazard Warning Flashers Button Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. When the button is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning Flashers. 1 — SOS Button 2 — ASSIST Button 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS and ASSIST button. WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. NOTE:  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber Ú page 370.  The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. ASSIST Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:  Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you will be connected to a representative for assistance. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle is being driven and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside assistance.  SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.  Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues.  Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for Radio, Phone and NAV issues. SOS Call 1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview Mirror. NOTE: In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror. 283 2. The LED light located between the SOS and ASSIST buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a SOS operator has been made. 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:  Indication that the occupant placed a SOS Call  The vehicle brand  The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional assistance is needed. WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284 284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE:  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.  Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional assistance is needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected with the SOS operator until the SOS operator terminates the connection. 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates. WARNING! WARNING!  If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. (Continued)  The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.  Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SOS Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities. SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls. If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:  The Rearview Mirror light located between the SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously be illuminated red.  The Device Screen will display the following message “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.” WARNING!  The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately. you will not have SOS Call services. If the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS Call system immediately. (Continued)  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility  Operator error by the SOS operator  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges- tion  Weather Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:  The ignition is in the OFF position  The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact  The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes WARNING!  Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean 285 disconnected during a vehicle crash  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286 286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE:  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho- rized by the subscriber.  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Automatic SOS — If Equipped Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can immediately connect you with help in the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided radio supplement for complete information. CAUTION! WARNING! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED WARNING!  Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. (Continued)  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P). 5. Place the ignition in OFF mode. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287 NOTE: 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel. Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the options for spare tire equipment may vary. Jacking Equipment Location EQUIPMENT REMOVAL Wheel Blocked Example NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being lifted or raised. J ACK A ND S PARE TIRE LOCATION The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if equipped) are stowed behind an access panel on the left hand side of the vehicle. 1. Remove the access panel to the jacking equipment. 2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire and gently remove it from the storage area. Remove wrench from foam tray. Jacking Equipment 1 — Inflatable Spare Tire 2 — Tire Service Kit 3 — Wrench 4 — Fuel Filler Funnel 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288 288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY WARNING!  Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.  Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.  Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Jack Location Jacking Equipment  Only use the jack in the positions indicated 1 — Inflatable Spare Tire 2 — Portable Air Compressor 1 — Jack Screw 2 — Jack 3. Turn the jack screw counterclockwise to remove the jack from the storage area behind the tire. J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:  Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.  Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.  Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK. (Continued) Jack Warning Label 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. Detailed information about the inflatable spare tire, its use, and operation Ú page 351. 289 2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange of the vehicle body. NOTE: Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are critical. See the following images for proper jacking locations. Front Lifting Point 7 Jacking Locations Extending The Wrench 1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left, one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Front Jack Location 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290 290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY WARNING! Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. Rear Lifting Point CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated. 3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn clockwise until the jack head is properly engaged in the described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. Rear Jacking Location 4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the compact spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. 5. Remove the wheel lug nuts. For vehicles with wheel covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle, located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable spare tire. 7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start inflating the inflatable spare after the tire has been mounted to the vehicle. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts with the wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is lowered you will have a second opportunity to torque the lug nuts Ú page 360. 8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure 60 psi (4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air Compressor Ú page 293 or Tire Service Kit if equipped Ú page 294. 9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare has reached its pressure and the compressor-hose has been removed from the tire valve. Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire CAUTION! Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly. 291 10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice Ú page 360. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station. 11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately. 12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the deflated tire in the inflatable spare tire location. Have the full-sized tire repaired or replaced, as soon as possible. 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292 292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 13. Stow the jack back in the stowage compartment and place the access panel back. The stud of the storage area must be threaded through the lower part of the jack. Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure it in place. NOTE: Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo area. ROAD T IRE I NSTALLATION Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1. Mount the road tire on the axle. 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. 3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover. 4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush onto the hub and there is no play. The nuts will have to be fully tightened once the vehicle is lowered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel under vehicle load can damage the threads, cause vibration, and undermine safety. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. Storing The Jack 1 — Jack Screw 2 — Jack 3 — Stud Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 1 — Valve Stem 2 — Valve Notch 3 — Road Tire 4 — Wheel Cover 5 — Wheel Lug Nut 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as described in the Jack Instructions section in this manual. Make sure that the valve stem is located near the ground, and then screw the air hose of the Portable Air Compressor to the valve stem. 5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. 6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice Ú page 360. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station. 7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel. PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR — I F EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor located in the side compartment of the cargo area to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar). 293 4. Uncoil the power plug and connect it the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet. 5. Always start the engine before turning ON the Portable Air Compressor. Portable Air Compressor 1 — Power Plug 2 — Deflation Button 3 — Pressure Gauge 4 — Power Button 5 — Air Hose Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable Spare Tire 1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the storage location. 2. Raise the vehicle as described in the Jacking Instructions within this section. 6. Switch the power button ON. 7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar) recommended as per the label on the wheel or if the vehicle equipped with the inflatable spare tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading information label located on the driver-side door opening. NOTE: If the tire is overinflated, use the deflation button to reduce the tire air pressure. 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294 294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 8. After the tire reaches the recommended pressure, lower the vehicle with the jack as described in the Jack Instructions section in this manual. RETURN INFLATABLE SPARE T IRE TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage location. Use this QR code to access your digital experience. 1. Return the Jack. 9. Remove the speed limit label sticker from the Portable Air Compressor and place it on the center of the steering wheel. 2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor and push the deflation button to do this step. See the Portable Air Compressor in this section for additional information. The inflatable spare tire will return to its original shape. Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). 10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store the foam tray in the cargo area. WARNING!  Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor by the hose.  Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only in the provided place.  The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. 3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its original stowage location and position facing outward. 4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel installed. 5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand. 6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air Compressor (if equipped) and tighten the strap. Tire Service Kit Storage Remove the rear panel to access the Tire Service Kit. 7. Install access panel door.  Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from open flames or heat source. Tire Service Kit Access Panel Location — If Equipped 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap, and is stored under the load floor within the second row. Tire Service Kit Components And Operation 295 Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.  Selecting Air Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position for air pump operation only.  Selecting Sealant Mode Tire Service Kit NOTE: Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, Tire Service Kit storage locations may vary. Tire Service Kit Components 1 — Sealant/Air Hose 2 — Hose Accessories 3 — Mode Select Knob 4 — Pressure Gauge 5 — Deflation Button 6 — Power Switch 7 — Sealant Bottle 8 — Power Plug Tire Service Kit Location — If Equipped Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the tire.  Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.  Using The Deflation Button Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes overinflated. 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296 296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions  Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum operation of the system. See the Sealant Bottle Replacement in this section for further information. for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them.  Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.  The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and needs to be replaced after each use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.  When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.  For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit.  The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.  The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal punctures on the tires' side walls.  You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) WARNING!  Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.  Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances:  If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi- mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.  If the tire has any sidewall damage.  If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure.  If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.  If the wheel has any damage.  If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. (Continued) WARNING!  Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source.  A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.  Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing.  Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers. 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 3. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button to set the ignition switch to the OFF position. 4. Apply the parking brake. 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem. 4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire. Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire: 1. Always start the vehicle before turning the Tire Service Kit on. 2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant Mode position. 297 3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle through the Sealant Hose and into the tire. NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose: 1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on. 2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available. Make sure the vehicle is running before turning the Tire Service Kit on. 3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance. 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298 298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant Hose: 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 bar). The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 bar) to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty. 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver-side door opening. Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge. If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes:  The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi (1.8 bar) within 15 minutes: NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit off. 2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire Service Kit and place sticker on the steering wheel. 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location. Drive Vehicle: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). WARNING! The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized dealer. After Driving:  Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.  Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.  Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the ignition in the OFF position.  Apply the parking brake. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE: If tire has improper inflation follow these next steps: 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose. 2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. 3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose onto the valve stem. 4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet. 5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end of the hose onto the valve stem. 6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air Mode position. 7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge. If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 bar): The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or higher: 1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading information label located in the driver-side door opening. NOTE: 299 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the Tire Service Kit. Sealant Bottle Replacement: 1. Unwrap the power cord. 2. Unwrap the hose. If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing. 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet. 7 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle. 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center. 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steering wheel after the tire has been repaired. Hose Location 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300 300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY NOTE: 3. Remove the bottle cover. When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. WARNING! Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. Remove The Bottle Remove The Bottle Cover 4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release. NOTE:  For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps reverse order.  Replacement sealant bottles are available at authorized service centers. JUMP STARTING Rotate The Bottle Up 5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor. If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START The battery in your vehicle is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. Battery Location NOTE: The positive battery post may be covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post. See the following steps to prepare for jump starting: 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (P) and place the ignition to OFF. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical accessories. 3. Pull upward and remove the protective cap over the remote positive (+) battery post. 4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cable’s reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. 301 J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE WARNING! Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. WARNING! CAUTION! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. WARNING!  Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.  Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.  Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post near the windshield cowl (exposed metallic/ unpainted post of the discharge vehicle). 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302 302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY WARNING! Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. 6. Once the engine is started, see the following disconnecting procedure for the next steps. Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery and reinstall the protective cap. If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at an authorized dealer. CAUTION! Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If refueling is necessary, while using an approved gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with the funnel to avoid spills. Refueling Funnel Emergency Gas Can Refueling Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling with a gas can. See the following steps for refueling: 1. Retrieve funnel from the rear storage area. NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel door by pushing at the rear center edge to unlatch. Fuel Funnel Location 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the fuel nozzle. WARNING!  Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is being filled.  Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.  A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a Inserting Funnel 3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper doors open. 4. Pour fuel into funnel opening. CAUTION! To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. 5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to putting back in the spare tire storage area. portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by an authorized dealer. In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.  On the highway — slow down.  In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans- mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase engine idle speed. 303 NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.  You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304 304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. To move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available. 4. The Manual Park Release access cover is connected to a red tether strap. Pull the tether strap out as far as it will go, then release it. The transmission should now be in NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be moved. MANUAL PARK RELEASE WARNING! You should be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to maintain control of the vehicle before activating the Manual Park Release. If possible, you should apply the parking brake. Activating the Manual Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured or properly connected to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle. Manual Park Release Access Cover Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park Release: 1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in the driver’s seat. 2. Apply the parking brake, if possible. 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the Manual Park Release access cover, which is to the lower left of the steering column. Tether Strap NOTE: When the lever is locked in the released position, the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and the access cover cannot be reinstalled. 5. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY To Reset The Manual Park Release: 1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while seated in the driver’s seat. 2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it. 3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back to its original position. 4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P). 5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully and reinstall the access cover. If the access cover cannot be reinstalled, repeat steps 1 through 4. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator. NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine. NOTE: Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 225. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again to restore “ESC On” mode. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 305 CAUTION!  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306 306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Flatbed Front ACCEPTABLE METHOD NOT ALLOWED Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. NOTE:  You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear wheels are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB) engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.  Vehicles with a discharged battery or total elec- trical failure when the EPB is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed. FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised). NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Vehicle Recovery Tow Points CAUTION! Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on the underbody of the vehicle. Recovery feature:  Is to be used by a professional ONLY. NOTE:  Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.  Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are  Is NOT to be used to recover secondary properly seated and secured in the attachment points.  This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained professional only.  Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled vehicle from its environment. vehicle.  Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.  Is to be used by a professional ONLY.  Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.  Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.  Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must manually disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver's door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB. If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is discharged, detailed instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle Ú page 304. CAUTION! Recovery load should:  Be applied at constant speed.  Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.  Be applied parallel to the center line of the  When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, length of the vehicle.  Not be an abrupt acceleration. Front Recovery Points 307  Be applied at constant speed.  Be applied parallel to the center line of the length of the vehicle.  Not be an abrupt acceleration. Vehicle damage may occur. do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.  Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being towed. 7 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308 308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ALL WHEEL D RIVE (AWD) MODELS FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. CAUTION!  Towing this vehicle using any other method can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.  Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System. This feature is a communication network that takes effect in the event of an impact. Detailed information can be found on Ú page 260. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Detailed information can be found on Ú page 261. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309 309 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than an authorized dealer Ú page 113. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:  Check engine oil level.  Check windshield washer fluid level.  Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder, fill as needed.  Check function of all interior and exterior lights. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310 310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE P LAN Refer to the Maintenance Plan for required maintenance. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:  Change oil and filter.  Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.  Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.  Inspect the CV/Universal joints.  Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.  Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.  Inspect exhaust system.  Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311 150,000 14 15 Or Kilometers: 240,000 140,000 13 224,000 130,000 12 208,000 120,000 11 192,000 110,000 10 176,000 100,000 9 160,000 90,000 8 144,000 80,000 7 128,000 70,000 6 112,000 60,000 5 96,000 50,000 4 80,000 40,000 3 64,000 2 48,000 Or Years: 32,000 Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First) 30,000 311 20,000 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary X X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function X X X X X X X Additional Inspections Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if necessary X 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 11 12 13 14 15 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 3 4 Or Kilometers: 80,000 10 40,000 9 2 64,000 8 30,000 7 Or Years: 48,000 6 20,000 5 Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes First) 32,000 50,000 312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Additional Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter X X Replace cabin air filter X X X To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km). Replace spark plugs1 X Replace the front accessory drive belt X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first X Replace PCV valve X X 1. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only; yearly intervals do not apply. WARNING!  You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.  Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L E NGINE 8 1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 2 — Engine Oil Fill 3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 4 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Windshield Washer Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Battery 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314 314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE CHECKING OIL L EVEL To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off. CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. ADDING W ASHER FLUID Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. There are four possible dipstick types:  Crosshatched zone. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.  Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY  Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, and periodic maintenance is not required. end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range.  Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and the MAX ends of the range. NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch markings on the dipstick. Adding 1 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end of the range marking. Windshield Washer Fluid Cap The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual washer fluid. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance. WARNING!  Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water Ú page 300. (Continued) 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING!  Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.  Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso- ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. CAUTION!  It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.  If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. PRESSURE WASHING Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended. 315 NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. CAUTION! WARNING! Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed. You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. VEHICLE MAINTENANCE An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. ENGINE OIL Engine Oil Selection Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluids Ú page 365. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316 316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE American Petroleum Institute (API) Approved Engine Oil These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark oils. The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils. The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and 5W-40 engine oil. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Synthetic Engine Oils Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only use synthetic API approved engine oils. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numbers should not be used. Materials Added To Engine Oil ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 310. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. ENGINE OIL FILTER The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used. WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters should be used. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION NOTE: Identify and correct problem before new belt is installed  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation). WARNING!  Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running. Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.  When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.  You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also, have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing. 317 Conditions that would require replacement: Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools; we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.  Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) from belt body)  Rib or belt wear  Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)  Belt slips  “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)  Belt broken For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318 318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING!  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- cants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information located online, for further warranty information.  The air conditioning system contains refrig- erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low global-warming potential. It is recommended that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment. The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter: 1. Remove all contents from the glove compartment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. Cabin Air Filter WARNING! Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury. Glove Compartment 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip 2. Open the glove compartment door partially, leaving extra slack on the glove compartment tension tether. Detach the glove compartment tension tether by sliding the black tension tether clip down, and popping it out of the slot on the side of the glove compartment door. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 3. There are glove compartment travel stops on either side of the glove compartment door. To release them, push inward on each travel stop, and pull the glove compartment door down until the travel stops pass clear of their hooking points. 5. Pry up the lid of each individual compartment snap, and detach it from the rest of the snap. There is a small space on the side of each snap to use for separating the lid from the snap. Once detached, remove the rest of the snap completely from the compartment cover. 4. Open the glove compartment door as far as possible to gain access to the cabin air filter compartment cover. 6. After removing the snaps, lift up the compartment cover to gain access to the fresh air inlet. 319 7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of the retaining tabs from their hooking points, and then pulling the filter cover out to expose the cabin air filter. Remove the air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing. 8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. CAUTION! The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. 9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter cover, making sure the retaining tabs are fully secured into their housings. Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover 1 — Compartment Cover 2 — Compartment Snap Fresh Air Inlet 1 — Filter Cover 2 — Retaining Tabs 10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover, and reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push the snap lids until fully attached. 11. Push the glove compartment door to the near closed position to reengage the glove compartment travel stops. Finally, pull the glove compartment tension tether clip down and slide it back into the slot on the side of the glove compartment door. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320 320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE BODY L UBRICATION Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically. Use a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch release mechanism, and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points: Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation CAUTION! Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.  Wear or uneven edges  Foreign material  Hardening or cracking  Deformation or fatigue If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged. Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position 1 — Wiper Blade 2 — Release Tab 3 — Wiper Arm 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm. 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade toward the right side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade from the wiper arm). 321 Installing The Front Wipers 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab open and the blade side of the wiper facing up and away from the windshield. 3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the release tab. 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click. Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position 1 — Wiper Blade 2 — Release Tab 3 — Wiper Arm Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper Blade 2 — Release Tab 3 — Wiper Arm 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322 322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass. NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. NOTE: Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap. 4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper blade, move the wiper blade upward and away from the wiper arm to disengage. Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position 1 — Wiper Blade 2 — Wiper Arm 3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position 1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 — Wiper Arm 3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the wiper arm. Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper Blade 2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin 3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle 4 — Wiper Arm 5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Installing The Rear Wiper 1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the glass. NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle. 2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. 3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand, and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper arm until it snaps into place. 4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place. EXHAUST SYSTEM The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING!  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you Ú page 278.  A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn, such as grass or leaves, and those items can come into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. 323 CAUTION!  The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.  Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324 324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to the manufacturer specifications, should be obtained immediately. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:  Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis- sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.  Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle.  Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo- nents disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. COOLING SYSTEM WARNING!  You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.  When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode. Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser. Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer. If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032). For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 310. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Selection Of Coolant For further information Ú page 365. NOTE:  Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.  This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recommended.  Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer. Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/ Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. 325  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.  Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. NOTE:  It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.  Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact an authorized dealer.  Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- mended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326 326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Cooling System Pressure Cap Disposal Of Used Coolant Cooling System Notes The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if equipped). Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. NOTE: The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. WARNING!  Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build-up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. See an authorized dealer for service. When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.  Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.  Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.  If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.  Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE  Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.  Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. BRAKE SYSTEM In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 310. WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. Brake Master Cylinder The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is illuminated. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid Ú page 366. WARNING!  Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid Ú page 366. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. (Continued) 327 WARNING!  To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.  Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contam- inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328 328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Fluid Level Check Fluid And Filter Changes Special Additives The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer specified transmission fluid Ú page 366. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder Ú page 366. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE FUSES General Information WARNING!  When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/ melt. Also, please be aware that using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.  If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. Underhood Fuses The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover. Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make sure engine is turned off. Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks located at each side of the PDC cover, avoid using screwdrivers or any other tool to remove the cover, since they may apply excessive force and result in a broken/damaged part.  Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. 329 Blade Fuses 1 — Fuse Element 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element (blown fuse) After service is done, secure the cover with its two locks. CAUTION! When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. NOTE: The function and amperage of the following fuses are different, depending on vehicle trim level and content. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330 330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Power Distribution Center Location Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description *If Equipped F06 – – Not Populated F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil / Fuel Injector F08 – – Not Populated Amplifier / Active Noise Control * F09 – 25 Amp Clear F10 – – Not Populated F11 – – Not Populated F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS) F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (S) * F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Cavity Cartridge Fuse F15 331 Blade Fuse Description 40 Amp Green – CBC / Power Locks F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter F18 40 Amp Green – CBC / EXT LIGHTS F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT * F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT * *If Equipped F22 – – Not Populated F23 – – Not Populated F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper 10 Amp Red Hands Free Dr Mod / Active Grille Shutter / Pwr Mirror / VRM F25 – F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT * F28 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port / USB+(IP) / Video USB Port / Overhead DVD Player(Aftermarket) F29 – – Not Populated F30 – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB / Power Lumbar * F31 – – Not Populated F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332 332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module * F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT * F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof * *If Equipped F36 – – Not Populated F37 40 Amp Green – CBC / Exterior Lights F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner * F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor F40 – – Not Populated F41 – – Not Populated F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module * F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC / Interior Lights F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter * F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module F48 – – Not Populated F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module-LT * F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT * F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Blade Fuse 333 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Description F53 – – Not Populated F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves F55 – 15 Amp Blue Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless Ignition System (KIN) / ESL / DVD *If Equipped F56 – 10 Amp Red Front and Rear HVAC Control Module / Occupant Classification Module (OCM) / Electronic Steering Lock (ESL) / ESP / ESC F57 – – Not Populated F58 – 10 Amp Red Drive Train Control Mod / Power Transfer Unit * F59 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle * F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo Pwr Outlet F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn * F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit * F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn * F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp * Not Populated F65 – – F66 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster 10 Amp Red Haptic Lane Feedback Module (HALF) / Parktronics System (PTS)/ Drivers Assist System Module (DASM) F67 – 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334 334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description F68 – – Not Populated F69 – – Not Populated F70 – – Not Populated F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirror * F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights* F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR Center Stack F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect / Center Display / Telematics – 10 Amp Red RR Entertainment / Media HUB / USB(S) / Rain Sensor / Sunroof / RR View Mirror/ Overhead DVD Player / INT Monitoring Camera / Wireless Charging Pad F78 – 15 Amp Blue TCM (ZF) / E-Shifter / Cluster F79 – 10 Amp Red ICS / HVAC / SCCM/ EPB SW *If Equipped F77 F80 – – Not Populated F81 – – Not Populated F82 – – Not Populated 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse 335 Description *If Equipped F83 20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights * 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Pump * F84 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control MOD * F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter F86 – – Not Populated F87 – – Not Populated F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats * F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats * F90 – – Not Populated F91 – 15 Amp Blue Front Ventilated Seats/Heated Steering Wheel * F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway F93 – – Not Populated 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336 336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC/RUN F95B – 10 Amp Red Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP (Direct) B+ Airbag *If Equipped F96 – 10 Amp Red F97 – 10 Amp Red Airbag F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp * F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Elect Brake Module * F100 – 10 Amp Red Headlamp Level / RR Camera / Blindspot / Humidity SNSR / In Car Temp SNSR / Headlamp SW * Circuit Breakers CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver) CB2 25 Amp * Power Seats (Pass) CB3 25 Amp FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes + RR PWR Window Lockout 30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337 BULB R EPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For replacement of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer. Interior Bulbs — Halogen Interior Bulbs Lamps Bulb Number Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966 NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. For replacement of LED lamps, see an authorized dealer. Exterior Bulbs — Halogen Exterior Bulbs Lamps Bulb Number Front Turn Signal Lamp WY21W / 7440NA Front Side Marker Lamp W3W / 2821 Rear Side Marker Lamp W3W / 2821 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338 338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Replacing Exterior Bulbs See the following steps to replace: 4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp socket clockwise to lock it in place. 1. Open the hood. FRONT AND REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS 2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing. See the following steps to replace: FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP 2. Firmly grab the front side marker lamp socket and rotate a quarter turn counterclockwise to remove it from the lamp assembly. 1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner and carefully peel back liner for access. Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal 3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket and replace with a new bulb. Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb. 4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly and rotate a quarter turn clockwise to lock into place. Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners 5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the three fasteners. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TIRES Tire Markings 339 NOTE:  P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.  European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro- pean design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. Tire Markings 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.  Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo- rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340 340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TIRE SIZING CHART EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)  Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code  "R" means radial construction, or  "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index  A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol  A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions  The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:  XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or  LL = Light load tire or  C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation  This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342 342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE: 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)  03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)  01 means the year 2001  Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-pillar Definition The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 343 This placard tells you important information about the: NOTE: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) Tire And Loading Information Placard Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in this manual Ú page 173. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Tire And Loading Information Placard For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, Ú page 173. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344 344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit— (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Metric Example For Load Limit For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. NOTE:  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.  For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346 346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:  Safety  Fuel Economy  Tread Wear  Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Safety WARNING!  Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.  Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.  Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.  Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.  Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.  Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. NOTE:  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door. At least once a month:  Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.  Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. 347 WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). Radial Ply Tires WARNING! Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:  The tire has not been driven on when flat.  The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348 348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed after driving with an underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under Run Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. NOTE: TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a flat tire condition. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat mode Ú page 236. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. Tire Tread 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced Ú page 349. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:  Driving style.  Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres- sures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.  Distance driven.  Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended. WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. NOTE: Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed Ú page 348. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 340. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. 349 WARNING!  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350 350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE TYPES All Season Tires — If Equipped All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. WARNING! Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire Ú page 294. CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated for temporary emergency use Ú page 181. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. WARNING! Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P. 351 Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire. WARNING! Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352 352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Full Size Spare — If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited Use Spare — If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. WARNING! Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. WHEEL A ND W HEEL TRIM CARE All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. CAUTION! Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking. Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels CAUTION! If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. 353 SNOW TRACTION D EVICES Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage:  Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.  No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.  Please follow the table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device: 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354 354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE FWD Trim Level Touring Touring L Touring L Plus Axle Tire/Wheel Size 235/65R17 235/60R18 Front Limited 235/60R18 Pinnacle 235/60R18 AWD Trim Level Touring Touring L Touring L Plus Axle Tire/Wheel Size 235/60R18 Front Snow Traction Device (maximum projection beyond tire profile or equivalent) 9 mm Cable/Chain Snow Traction Device (maximum projection beyond tire profile or equivalent) 9 mm Cable/Chain Limited Pinnacle 235/60R18 WARNING! Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE CAUTION! CAUTION! To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:  Because of restricted traction device clear- ance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use.  Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not require retightening.  Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).  Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.  Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. (Continued)  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). 355 The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed Ú page 309. The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.  Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Tire Rotation (Forward Cross) DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356 356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. TREADWEAR The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. TRACTION G RADES The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. TEMPERATURE G RADES The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE STORING THE VEHICLE If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.  Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. BODYWORK PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. 357 The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. What Causes Corrosion? PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. The most common causes are:  Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation  Stone and gravel impact  Insects, tree sap and tar  Salt in the air near seacoast localities  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. Washing  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the paint.  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. CAUTION!  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate- rials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.  Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358 358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Special Care  If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.  It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.  If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately.  If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.  If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.  If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.  Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. INTERIORS SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. WARNING! A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for inspection. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE PLASTIC AND C OATED PARTS Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. CAUTION!  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel- lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.  Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. LEATHER SURFACES 359 CAUTION! Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. GLASS SURFACES Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements. NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. 8 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360 360 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light. Vehicle Identification Number NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Bolt Size Lug Nut/Bolt Socket Size 100 ft-lb (135 N·m) M12 x 1.5 19 mm **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall socket. Wheel Mounting Surface 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway). WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. FUEL REQUIREMENTS Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly tightened. While operating on gasoline with the required octane number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended octane number can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. 361 3.6L E NGINE Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine. This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide optimum fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane premium gasoline is not required, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines. REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. 9 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362 362 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol. CAUTION! DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL VEHICLES CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:  Operate in a lean mode  OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on  Poor engine performance  Poor cold start and cold drivability  Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N GASOLINE MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS 363 CAUTION!  The use of fuel additives, which are now being CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance. sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. (Continued) 9 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364 364 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FLUID CAPACITIES US Metric 19 Gallons 71 Liters 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters 13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty Cooling 13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cooling 12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cooling 12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling Fuel (Approximate) 3.6L Engine Engine Oil With Filter 3.6L Engine Cooling System* 3.6L Engine * Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 365 ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the API Starburst trademark Ú page 316. Engine Oil Filter We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements. Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85). 9 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366 366 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CAUTION!  Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.  This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367 367 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem. PREPARE A L IST Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know. BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer Assistance center. Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center should include the following information:  Owner's name and address  Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)  Authorized dealer name  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)  Vehicle delivery date and mileage FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: (800) 247-9753 FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French 10 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368 368 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE MEXICO Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D.F. In Mexico City: 800-505-1300 Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568 PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS FCA Caribbean LLC P.O. Box 191857 San Juan 00919-1857 Phone: (800) 247-9753 Fax: (787) 782-3345 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. SERVICE CONTRACT We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call FCA US LLC's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further information. I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND WASHINGTON, D.C. See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further information. Use this QR code to access your digital experience. MOPAR® PARTS Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and factory filled fluids are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain its original condition. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. 369 To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. I N C ANADA If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/ PCDB-BDPP. 10 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370 370 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components and is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. To access your Owner's Information online, visit www.mopar.com/om (US) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Or Call Tech Authority toll free at:  1-800-890-4038 (US) Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty Information Books can be ordered through Archway at: Diagnostic Procedure Manuals  1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment. GENERAL INFORMATION To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic Procedure manuals, visit: www.techauthority.com (US and Canada). Owner's Manuals These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA vehicles. The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371 371 INDEX A About Your Brakes .........................................360 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) .................................... 146, 147 Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............325 Additives, Fuel ...............................................363 Adjust Down ........................................................... 47 Forward ....................................................... 47 Rearward..................................................... 47 Up................................................................ 47 Air Bag ...........................................................251 Air Bag Operation ......................................252 Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 250, 252 Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................257 Enhanced Accident Response ......... 260, 308 Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................308 Front Air Bag .............................................252 If Deployment Occurs ................................259 Knee Impact Bolsters ................................256 Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............261 Maintenance .............................................261 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light............. 251 Side Air Bags ............................................ 257 Transporting Pets ..................................... 279 Air Bag Light................................121, 250, 279 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 316 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 317 Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 317, 318 Air Conditioner System ................................. 317 Air Conditioning Filter ..............................83, 318 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................83 Air Filter ........................................................ 316 Air Pressure Tires ......................................................... 347 Alarm Arm The System ..........................................22 Disarm The System .....................................22 Security Alarm .......................................... 124 All Wheel Drive Towing ...................................................... 308 All Wheel Drive (AWD) ................................... 143 Alterations/Modifications Vehicle.........................................................10 Amazon FireTV ..................................... 213, 218 Amazon FireTV Built-In .................................. 213 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................. 325, 364 Disposal .................................................... 326 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................... 223 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 124 Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 227 Audio Jack ........................................................87 Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 187 Auto Up Power Windows ..................................93 Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................57 Automatic Headlights .......................................67 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............82 Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 139 Automatic Transmission................................ 140 Adding Fluid ..................................... 328, 366 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 328 Fluid Change............................................. 328 Fluid Level Check...................................... 328 Fluid Type ........................................ 328, 366 Special Additives ...................................... 328 11 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372 372 AutoPark ........................................................132 AUX Cord.......................................................... 87 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 89 AWD Towing .......................................................308 Axle Lubrication .............................................366 B Back-Up Camera ............................................168 Battery ................................................. 121, 314 Charging System Light...............................121 Jump Starting ............................................300 Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 15 Battery Saver Feature ...................................... 68 Belts, Seat .....................................................279 Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................229 Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................320 B-Pillar Location.............................................343 Brake Assist System ......................................224 Brake Control System, Electronic ..................224 Brake Fluid ....................................................366 Brake System ...................................... 327, 360 Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................360 Fluid Check ..................................... 327, 366 Master Cylinder .........................................327 Parking ......................................................136 Warning Light ............................................122 Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................... 140 Brightness, Interior Lights ................................69 Bulb Replacement ............................... 337, 338 Bulbs, Light ................................. 281, 337, 338 C Camera ......................................................... 168 Camera, Rear ....................................... 168, 169 Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 364 Caps, Filler Fuel .......................................................... 172 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 313 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 326 Car Washes................................................... 357 Carbon Monoxide Warning............................ 281 Cargo Vehicle Loading ........................................ 100 Cargo Area Cover .......................................... 100 Cargo Compartment Luggage Carrier ........................................ 106 Cargo Load Floor........................................... 100 Cargo Tie-Downs ........................................... 100 Cellular Phone .............................................. 222 Certification Label......................................... 173 Chains, Tire ................................................... 353 Change Oil Indicator ..................................... 114 Changing A Flat Tire ...................................... 286 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 340 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ......................... 130 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .................. 278 Checks, Safety .............................................. 278 Child Restraint .............................................. 262 Child Restraints Booster Seats ........................................... 265 Center Seat LATCH ................................... 271 Child Seat Installation...................... 273, 275 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 272 Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 263 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......................................... 266 Older Children And Child Restraints.......... 264 Seating Positions ...................................... 266 Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............. 276 Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 361 Cleaning Wheels ...................................................... 352 Climate Control ................................................72 Automatic ....................................................72 Manual ........................................................77 Rear ......................................................76, 81 Cold Weather Operation ................................ 134 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373 373 Compact Spare Tire .......................................351 Computer, Trip/Travel ...................................121 Contract, Service ...........................................368 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap).............326 Cooling System ..............................................324 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................325 Coolant Level ............................................326 Cooling Capacity ........................................364 Disposal Of Used Coolant ..........................326 Drain, Flush, And Refill ..............................324 Inspection ....................................... 324, 326 Points To Remember .................................326 Pressure Cap .............................................326 Radiator Cap .............................................326 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ........................ 325, 364, 365 Corrosion Protection ......................................357 Cruise Control ................................................146 Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................147 Cruise Light ......................................... 127, 128 Customer Assistance .....................................367 Cybersecurity .................................................187 D Daytime Running Lights ...................................65 Dealer Service .............................................. 315 Defroster, Windshield ................................... 279 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..............................70 Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................... 129 Dimmer Switch Headlight .....................................................65 Dipsticks Oil (Engine) ............................................... 314 Disable Vehicle Towing ................................. 306 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 326 Door Ajar .............................................. 122, 123 Door Ajar Light ..................................... 122, 123 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................33 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water .................................... 186 E Electric Brake Control System....................... 224 Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 223 Traction Control System ........................... 228 Electric Parking Brake................................... 136 Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................59 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................... 225 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 123 Emergency Braking ....................................... 235 Emergency, In Case Of Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 282 Jacking............................................. 286, 288 Jump Starting ........................................... 300 Overheating .............................................. 303 Towing ...................................................... 306 Emission Control System Maintenance......... 130 Engine ........................................................... 313 Air Cleaner ................................................ 316 Block Heater ............................................. 135 Break-In Recommendations ..................... 135 Checking Oil Level .................................... 314 Compartment ........................................... 313 Compartment Identification ...................... 313 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 365 Cooling...................................................... 324 Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 281 Fails To Start............................................. 134 Flooded, Starting ...................................... 134 Fuel Requirements ................................... 361 Oil ...........................................315, 364, 365 Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 313 11 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374 374 Oil Filter .....................................................316 Oil Selection .................................... 315, 364 Oil Synthetic ..............................................316 Overheating ...............................................303 Starting .....................................................131 Enhanced Accident Response Feature ................................................ 260, 308 Ethanol ..........................................................362 Exhaust Gas Cautions....................................281 Exhaust System ................................... 281, 323 Exterior Lighting ......................................65, 338 Exterior Lights ...................... 65, 281, 337, 338 F Filters Air Cleaner.................................................316 Air Conditioning ..................................83, 318 Engine Oil ........................................ 316, 365 Engine Oil Disposal ...................................316 FireTV ............................................................218 Flashers Hazard Warning.........................................282 Turn Signals .................... 65, 128, 281, 338 Flash-To-Pass ........................................... 65, 67 Flat Tire Changing ....................... 286, 339, 350 Flat Tire Stowage ........................ 294, 339, 350 Flooded Engine Starting ................................134 Fluid Capacities ............................................ 364 Fluid Leaks ................................................... 281 Fluid Level Checks Brake ........................................................ 327 Engine Oil ................................................. 314 Fluid, Brake .................................................. 366 Fog Lights .................................................65, 68 Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating ....................42 Fold-Flat Seats .................................................33 Forward Collision Warning ............................ 233 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................................ 305 Front Position Light ....................................... 338 Fuel ............................................................... 361 Additives ................................................... 363 Clean Air ................................................... 361 Ethanol ..................................................... 362 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 172 Gasoline ................................................... 361 Materials Added ....................................... 363 Methanol .................................................. 362 Octane Rating.................................. 361, 365 Requirements ........................................... 361 Specifications ........................................... 365 Tank Capacity ........................................... 364 Fuses ............................................................ 329 G Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................61 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............................... 172 Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 361 Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 361 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 361 Gear Ranges ................................................. 141 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 359 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 175 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 174 GVWR ............................................................ 173 H Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water ................... 186 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 282 Head Restraints ...............................................52 Headlights ........................................................65 Cleaning.................................................... 357 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........65 Lights On Reminder ..............................65, 67 Passing .................................................65, 67 Switch ..........................................................65 Time Delay ...................................................65 Washers.......................................................67 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375 375 Heated Mirrors ......................................... 57, 60 Heated Seats ................................................... 51 Heater, Engine Block .....................................135 Hill Start Assist ..............................................227 Hitches Trailer Towing ............................................176 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................... 61 Hood Prop ........................................................ 96 Hood Release .................................................. 96 Interior Lights...................................................69 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................70 Inverter Power ..........................................................91 I Ignition ............................................................ 18 Switch ......................................................... 18 Indicator Lights Blue ...........................................................129 Green ........................................................127 White .........................................................128 Yellow ........................................................127 Inside Rearview Mirror ............................57, 282 Instrument Cluster ............................... 110, 112 Display ......................................................112 Display Controls ........................................113 Menu Items ...............................................116 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................359 Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 69 Interior Appearance Care...............................358 K Key Fob ............................................................14 Arm The System ..........................................22 Disarm The Alarm ........................................22 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............16 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................15 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................16 Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .......................................24 Passive Entry ...............................................24 Keys .................................................................14 Keysense ...................................................... 115 J Jack Location ................................................ 287 Jack Operation .............................................. 286 Jump Starting ............................................... 300 L Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................65 Lane Change Assist...................................65, 68 LaneSense .................................................... 166 Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 241 Latches ......................................................... 281 Hood ............................................................96 Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 361 Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 281 Life Of Tires ................................................... 349 Liftgate .............................................................97 Power...........................................................97 Light Bulbs ........................................... 281, 338 Lights ............................................................ 281 Air Bag ....................................121, 250, 279 Anti Lock Brake System ............................ 124 Automatic Emergency Braking OFF ........... 127 Battery Saver ...............................................68 Brake Assist Warning................................ 227 Brake Warning .......................................... 122 Bulb Replacement ........................... 337, 338 Cruise .............................................. 127, 128 Daytime Running .........................................65 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................65 Electric Power Steering Fault .................... 122 11 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376 376 Electronic Park Brake ................................124 Electronic Stability Control Active ..............125 Electronic Throttle Control .........................123 Engine Temperature Warning....................123 Exterior ............................................ 281, 338 Fog .....................................................68, 127 Headlights ............................................ 65, 67 High Beam ................................................129 High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 65 Hood Open ................................................123 Instrument Cluster ...................................... 65 Intensity Control .......................................... 69 Interior ........................................................ 69 KeySense ..................................................128 LaneSense ...................................... 125, 128 Liftgate Open.............................................123 Lights On Reminder.............................. 65, 67 Low Fuel ....................................................125 Low Washer Fluid ......................................125 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .......125 Oil Pressure ...............................................123 Oil Temperature ........................................123 Park...........................................................128 Passing................................................. 65, 67 Reading ....................................................... 69 Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 124 Security Alarm .......................................... 124 Service ..................................................... 337 Service Automatic Emergency Braking ..... 126 Service AWD ............................................. 126 Service LaneSense ................................... 125 Service Stop Start System ........................ 126 Side Marker .............................................. 338 SmartBeams ...............................................66 Speed ....................................................... 128 Stop Start Active ....................................... 128 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 126 Traction Control ........................................ 227 Transmission Temperature....................... 124 Turn Signals .................... 65, 128, 281, 338 Load Floor, Cargo.......................................... 100 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .................... 119 Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 119 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 119 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor............ 119 Loading Vehicle ................................... 100, 173 Tires ......................................................... 343 Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 236 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 320 Lug Nuts ....................................................... 360 Luggage Carrier ............................................ 106 M Maintenance ....................................................96 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 314 Maintenance Schedule ................................. 309 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ..................................... 125, 130 Manual Park Release ............................................ 304 Service ...................................................... 370 Map/Reading Lights ........................................69 Marker Lights, Side ....................................... 338 Media Hub .......................................................87 Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................33 Memory Seat ......................................32, 33, 59 Memory Seats And Radio .................................33 Methanol....................................................... 362 Mini-Trip Computer ....................................... 121 Mirrors .............................................................57 Automatic Dimming .....................................57 Electric Remote ...........................................59 Exterior Folding ............................................60 Heated ..................................................57, 60 Memory .......................................................32 Outside .................................................57, 58 Rearview ............................................ 57, 282 Vanity ...........................................................58 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377 377 Modifications/Alterations Vehicle ........................................................ 10 Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................236 Mopar Parts ...................................................369 MP3 Control .................................................... 87 Multi-Function Control Lever............................ 65 N New Vehicle Break-In Period..........................135 O Occupant Restraints ......................................239 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 361, 365 Oil Change Indicator ......................................114 Reset .........................................................114 Oil Filter, Change ...........................................316 Oil Filter, Selection.........................................316 Oil Pressure Light ..........................................123 Oil, Engine ........................................... 315, 365 Capacity ....................................................364 Checking ...................................................314 Dipstick .....................................................314 Disposal ....................................................316 Filter ................................................ 316, 365 Filter Disposal ...........................................316 Identification Logo.....................................316 Materials Added To .................................. 316 Pressure Warning Light ............................ 123 Recommendation ............................ 315, 364 Synthetic .................................................. 316 Viscosity ................................................... 364 Onboard Diagnostic System.......................... 129 Operating Precautions .................................. 129 Operator Manual Owner's Manual ........................................ 370 Outside Rearview Mirrors .........................57, 58 Overheating, Engine...................................... 303 Power Seats Down ...........................................................47 Forward .......................................................47 Rearward .....................................................47 Up ................................................................47 Power Sliding Door On / Off Switch .....................................28, 97 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 247 Preparation For Jacking ................................ 286 Pretensioners Seat Belts ................................................. 247 P Paint Care ..................................................... 357 Parking Brake ............................................... 136 ParkSense Active Park Assist........................ 162 ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 156 Passive Entry ...................................................24 Pets .............................................................. 279 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 343 Power Brakes ...................................................... 360 Inverter ........................................................91 Mirrors .........................................................59 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................89 Seats ....................................................47, 49 Steering .................................................... 143 R Radial Ply Tires.............................................. 347 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 326 Radio Operation ............................................ 222 Rear Air Conditioning ................................76, 81 Rear Camera ................................................. 169 Rear Cross Path ............................................ 232 Rear ParkSense System................................ 156 Rear Seat Entertainment .............................. 213 Rear Seat Reminder...................................... 228 Rear Seat Removal ..........................................35 Rear View .........................................................57 Reclining Front Seats .......................................34 Recreational Towing...................................... 184 11 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378 378 Reformulated Gasoline ..................................361 Refrigerant ....................................................318 Release, Hood ................................................. 96 Reminder, Lights On ........................................ 65 Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................240 Remote Control Starting System ........................................... 19 Remote Keyless Entry Arm The Alarm............................................. 22 Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 22 Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 16 Remote Starting Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 20 Remote Starting System .................................. 19 Replacement Bulbs .......................................337 Replacement Tires.........................................349 Reporting Safety Defects ...............................369 Restraints, Child ............................................262 Restraints, Head .............................................. 52 Roof Luggage Rack ........................................106 Rotation, Tires ...............................................355 S Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................279 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................280 Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................369 Safety Information, Tire .................................339 Safety Tips .....................................................278 Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................281 Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 309 Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 124 Seat Belts ............................................ 240, 279 Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 244 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 244 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ..................................... 244 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 247 Child Restraints ........................................ 262 Energy Management Feature ................... 247 Extender ................................................... 246 Front Seat............................... 240, 241, 243 Inspection................................................. 279 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 243 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 243 Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 241 Operating Instructions .............................. 243 Pregnant Women ...................................... 247 Pretensioners ........................................... 247 Rear Seat ................................................. 241 Reminder.................................................. 240 Seat Belt Extender.................................... 246 Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 247 Untwisting Procedure ............................... 243 Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 358 Seats ................................................. 33, 47, 51 Adjustment ............................. 33, 34, 35, 47 Bench ..........................................................35 Heated.........................................................51 Memory .......................................................32 Power....................................................47, 49 Rear Folding ................................................33 Reclining ......................................................34 Seatback Release..........................33, 34, 35 Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor) .............................42 Tilting ....................................................33, 34 Security Alarm ............................................... 124 Arm The System ...........................................22 Disarm The System......................................22 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 365 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................17 Service Assistance ........................................ 367 Service Contract ............................................ 368 Service Manuals ........................................... 370 Shifting Automatic Transmission ........................... 140 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 241 Side View Mirror Adjustment ............................57 Signals, Turn ........................65, 128, 281, 338 SmartBeams ....................................................66 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 353 Snow Tires .................................................... 350 Spare Tire Changing ...................................... 286 Spare Tire Stowage ....................................... 294 Spare Tires ........................ 287, 350, 351, 352 Spark Plugs ................................................... 365 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379 379 Specifications Oil ..............................................................365 Speed Control Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................151 Cancel .......................................................147 Resume .....................................................147 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......................147 Starting ...................................................19, 131 Button ......................................................... 18 Cold Weather ............................................134 Engine Fails To Start .................................134 Remote ....................................................... 19 Starting And Operating ..................................131 Starting Procedures .......................................131 Steering .........................................................143 Tilt Column .................................................. 31 Wheel, Heated............................................. 31 Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 31 Storage, Vehicle............................................... 83 Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats....................... 42 Stow ‘n Vac ....................................................100 Streaming ......................................................213 Stuck, Freeing ...............................................305 Sun Roof ................................................... 94, 96 Sunglasses Storage ......................................... 84 Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .....251 Sway Control, Trailer ......................................229 Symbol Glossary .............................................. 10 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 316 System, Remote Starting .................................19 T Telescoping Steering Column ..........................31 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............82 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ................................. 100 Tilt Steering Column ........................................31 Time Delay Headlight .....................................................65 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 343 Tire Markings ................................................ 339 Tire Safety Information ................................. 339 Tire Service Kit .............................................. 294 Tire Service Kit — If Equipped ................ 294 Tire Stowage ................................................. 294 Tires ......................... 280, 346, 350, 351, 355 Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 349 Air Pressure .............................................. 346 Chains ...................................................... 353 Changing .................................................. 286 Compact Spare......................................... 351 General Information ............... 346, 350, 351 High Speed ............................................... 347 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 347 Jacking ............................................ 286, 288 Life Of Tires .............................................. 349 b Load Capacity ........................................... 343 Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................................116, 126, 236 Quality Grading ......................................... 355 Radial ....................................................... 347 Replacement ............................................ 349 Rotation .................................................... 355 Safety .............................................. 339, 346 Sizes ......................................................... 340 Snow Tires ................................................ 350 Spare Tires ................... 287, 350, 351, 352 Spinning ................................................... 348 Trailer Towing ........................................... 181 Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 348 Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 360 To Open Hood ..................................................96 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 180 Towing ........................................................... 174 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 306 Guide ........................................................ 177 Recreational ............................................. 184 Weight ...................................................... 177 Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 184 Traction ......................................................... 185 Traction Control ............................................ 228 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 229 11 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380 380 Trailer Towing ................................................174 Hitches ......................................................176 Minimum Requirements............................180 Tips ...........................................................183 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................180 Wiring ........................................................182 Trailer Towing Guide ......................................177 Trailer Weight ................................................177 Transaxle Automatic ..................................................139 Operation ..................................................139 Transmission .................................................140 Automatic ........................................ 140, 328 Maintenance .............................................328 Transporting Pets ..........................................279 Tread Wear Indicators ...................................348 Turn Signals ...................................65, 128, 338 U Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display .......................................................... 188 Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features .............24 Passive Entry Programming .........................24 Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 355 Universal Garage Door Opener (Homelink®) .............................................61 Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 361 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 243 USB ..................................................................87 b V Vacuum ........................................................ 100 Stow ‘n Vac ............................................... 100 Vanity Mirrors ..................................................58 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 360 Vehicle Loading ................................... 173, 343 Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 315 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................10 Vehicle Storage ................................................83 Voice Command...............................................56 Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................56 W Warning Lights Red ........................................................... 121 Yellow ....................................................... 124 Warning Lights And Messages ...................... 121 Warranty Information .................................... 369 Washers, Windshield .................................... 314 Washing Vehicle ............................................ 357 Water Driving Through ........................................ 186 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 352 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 352 Wind Buffeting .................................................94 Window Fogging ...............................................83 Windows ..........................................................92 Power...........................................................92 Windshield Defroster .................................... 279 Windshield Washers .............................. 70, 314 Fluid.......................................................... 314 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 320 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 320 Wipers, Intermittent .........................................70 Wireless Charging Pad .....................................91 Wrecker Towing............................................. 306 This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/ Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer. WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws. This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions. Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend, or use public transportation. WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. U. S. Canada SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL, RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS mopar.com/om 2022 Chrysler Pacifica owners.mopar.ca ©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC or FCA Canada Inc., used under license. Chrysler est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC ou FCA Canada Inc., utilisée sous le permis. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 2 0 2 2 C H RYS L E R PAC I F I C A Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only). Third Edition 22_RUP_OM_EN_USC OWNER’S MANUAL